QDA-700 User`s Guide

QDA-700 User`s Guide
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.
QDA-700 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.
INPUT METHOD ............................................................................................................19
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.
USING AUDIO PLAYER ..............................................................................................126
USING VOICE RECORDER.......................................................................................... 133
USING CAMERA........................................................................................................ 138
USING VIDEO RECORDER & PLAYER......................................................................... 141
USING PHOTO VIEWER .............................................................................................146
USING PHOTO EDITOR ..............................................................................................162
CONNECTION.............................................................................................................. 166
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.
PHONE PREFERENCES .................................................................................................81
GENERAL PREFERENCES .............................................................................................96
APPLICATION LAUNCHER SETTINGS ..........................................................................123
MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................. 125
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7.
USING SMS................................................................................................................58
USING MMS ..............................................................................................................67
USING PALMSOURCE MAIL .........................................................................................72
PREFERENCES..............................................................................................................80
5.1
5.2
5.3
6.
ON-SCREEN SOFT BUTTONS .......................................................................................39
DIALING CALLS ..........................................................................................................42
RECEIVING CALLS ......................................................................................................45
CONTACTS..................................................................................................................46
CALL HISTORY ...........................................................................................................52
SPEED DIAL ................................................................................................................54
TODAY VIEW ..............................................................................................................56
MESSAGES.....................................................................................................................57
4.1
4.2
4.3
5.
USING THE ONSCREEN KEYBOARD ..............................................................................20
USING GRAFFITI 2 WRITING ........................................................................................22
USING CHINESE OS & PENPOWER HANDWRITING APPLICATION .................................28
PHONE APPLICATION OVERVIEW ...........................................................................37
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.
QDA-700 HANDSET FEATURES .....................................................................................4
CHARGING THE BATTERY..............................................................................................7
INSERTING THE SIM CARD ............................................................................................8
FIRST RUN....................................................................................................................9
TURNING THE RADIO O N AND OFF ..............................................................................15
MAKING YOUR FIRST PHONE C ALL .............................................................................16
RESETTING YOUR QDA-700 .......................................................................................17
BROWSING INTERNET ............................................................................................... 167
USING HOT SYNC ......................................................................................................171
USING BEAM ............................................................................................................180
EXCHANGING INFORMATION VIA BEAMING ..............................................................181
USING PALM DESKTOP .............................................................................................185
ORGANIZER ................................................................................................................229
8.1
USING THE DATE BOOK ............................................................................................ 230
-1-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.2
8.3
8.4
9.
USING MEMO PAD ....................................................................................................244
USING TO DO LIST ................................................................................................... 246
USING CALCULATOR ................................................................................................ 250
DOCUMENTS VIEWER ..............................................................................................252
9.1
9.2
10.
10.1
10.2
10.3
11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
12.
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
USING DOCUMENTS TO GO VIEWER ......................................................................... 253
USING PALMREADER ................................................................................................ 265
UTILITIES.................................................................................................................276
USING CLOCK....................................................................................................... 277
FILE MOVER ...........................................................................................................279
USING BACKUP ....................................................................................................... 286
MISCELLANEOUS................................................................................................... 300
USING CARD INFO .................................................................................................. 301
USING SECURITY ....................................................................................................303
WELCOME .............................................................................................................. 305
GAMES ......................................................................................................................307
BEJEWELED ............................................................................................................308
FRUIT FROLIC ......................................................................................................... 309
RICOCHET ............................................................................................................... 311
SPYCHASE 3D ........................................................................................................ 313
13.
DOC OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................314
14.
CARD OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 315
15.
TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................316
16.
NOTICE ..................................................................................................................... 320
-2-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1. QDA-700 overview
Congratulation on purchase QDA-700. This is a GSM dual-band smartphone which
powered by Palm OS. With QDA-700, you can:
•
•
•
•
Communicate with your friends, relatives, partners, etc. by voice calls and
electronic mails.
Manage your daily life with the built-in Palm OS applications
Shoot every precious moment with the built-in 1.3M pixels digital camera
Enjoy your favorite MP3 music.
What’s included in the package
The QDA-700 received all of the following components:
Hardware
• QDA-700 handset
• AC charger
• USB HotSync® cable
• Electrical socket adapter(s)
Documentation and software
• Quick Start Guide
• Application Software CD
-3-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.1 QDA-700 handset features
The following illustrations show the locations and names of the physical features of the
QDA-700. Refer back to these illustrations while following the instructions in this guide.
Front View
Flip opener
Home Button
Menu Button
Dial Button
Reject Button
5-way navigator
Microphone
-4-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Side View
Antenna
Volume buttons
SD/MMC memory card slot
Camera button / shutter
Reset button
Infrared (IR) port
Stylus slot
Power button
Headset jack
LED (wireless mode
and power indicator)
HotSync & power supply connector
-5-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Back Side
Speaker
Camera lens
Power lock
Battery lock
Rechargeable Battery
SIM slot
-6-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.2 Charging the battery
Before using your QDA-700, a battery recharging is necessary, especially when you first
remove it from the box. We recommend 3-4 hours for a full charge, or until the red
charging indicator LED switched off.
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet. If necessary, connect an adapter.
2. With a triangle facing the same way as your QDA-700 screen, connect the charger
cable to the power supply connector at the bottom of the QDA-700.
3. To confirm your QDA-700 is charging, check the LED.
• When the LED is solid red, your QDA-700 is charging.
• When the LED is off, your QDA-700 is fully charged.
If the LED does not turn on when the QDA-700 is connected to the charger,
double-check the cable connection and the electrical outlet to which it is connected.
The onscreen battery gauge displays power status after you turn on your QDA-700,
• Full battery icon: Battery is charged (add the dedicated battery icon of status bar)
• Partial battery icon: Battery has power and is not charging (add the dedicated
battery icon of status bar)
• Empty battery icon: Battery needs charging immediately (add the dedicated
battery icon of status bar)
• Red lightning bolt: Charging (add the dedicated battery icon of status bar)
Remarks: Battery consumption may vary due to different usage behavior. Consumption
factors include GSM signal strength, backlight and camera usage, and whether calls are
data or voice calls.
-7-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.3 Inserting the SIM card
A valid SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card for GSM network must be inserted to work
the phone, email and web browsing features of your QDA-700. Please contact and
subscribe to your local mobile phone service provider.
1. Remove the battery from QDA-700 (Note: Don’t forget to unlock the power lock!)
2. Open the SIM tray out.
3. Insert the SIM card into the SIM tray by aligning the notches.
4. Close the SIM tray.
5. If your SIM card has not already been activated, follow the activation steps provided
by your mobile service provider or contact them directly for assistance. Data services
must be activated before using email, web browsing and MMS. For details, please
check with your mobile phone service provider.
Both 3-volt and 5-volt SIM cards can be used with your QDA-700. Please check with your
mobile phone service provider if you have any SIM-related queries.
-8-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.4 First Run
Before you can use your QDA-700 for phone calls or general organizer features, the
QDA-700 battery must be fully charged and the QDA-700 must be setup properly during
the first run.
To setup your QDA-700 during the first run:
1. Make sure the battery is fully charged and the power lock is set to the LOCKED
position.
2. Open the flip and the Setup 1 of 4 screen displays.
3. Pick the stylus from the stylus slot and tab twice anywhere on the screen to continue.
-9-
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4. Tap the center of target shown at the upper-left, bottom-right and the center of the
screen.
5. Tap the arrow and boxes to change the following settings and tap Next to continue.
•
•
•
•
•
Country
Time Zone
Daylight Saving
Date
Time
6. Tap Done to exit the setup and Installer screen displays.
You can return to this setup screen and go through the tutorial on how to enter data to
your QDA-700 afterwards.
- 10 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7. By default, the following programs are selected (with tick displays) and will be
installed on your QDA-700 automatically.
l
Docs to Go
Docs to Go (Documents To Go) allows you to use Word and Excel files,
including support for their native file formats, on your QDA-700 anywhere,
anytime.
l
PenPower
Penpower Chinese Handwriting Recognition application allows you to input
Chinese characters using conventional Chinese handwriting strokes. You are
advised to install PenPower if you are not familiar with common Chinese input
methods such as Changjei, Quick, PinYin, etc.
l
CHOS
CHOS (Chinese Operating System) allows you to view and enter traditional
Chinese characters in most Palm applications (include SMS, MMS, and email)
in your QDA-700. You must install CHOS if you want to read and write Chinese
SMS, MMS and email.
To toggle the selection, tap the box next to the application name.
8. Tap Install to install the selected application(s), or tap Exit to leave the setup screen
without installing any applications.
9. The Launcher II runs and the Home screen displays.
Congratulations! You have setup your QDA-700 successfully!
- 11 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Launcher II
Launcher II is the starting point (also known as Home) of all applications in your
QDA-700.
You can find and launch most applications by tapping the appropriate icons here.
At the top of Launcher II is the Status Bar which shows the status of time, battery level,
radio signal, etc. At the bottom of Launcher II there are 2 on-screen soft buttons: List and
Menu. The left-most and right-most hard button (i.e., Home Button and Menu Button)
correspond to the 2 on-screen soft buttons respectively.
More details of Launcher II will be discussed in Chapter 5.
- 12 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Status Bar
Status bar is a convenient area to access many functions and shows essential
information. It is accessible in most applications.
(from left to right)
1. Home (i.e., Launc her II)
2. Time and Battery
3. Input method
4. Input enabler
5. Message alert
6. Network status
7. Volume control
8. Input area
9. Menu
Home
Tap to display Home screen of Launcher II
Time and Battery
Tap to open the Time and Battery screen, which
shows the date, time, week, battery level and
brightness control.
To adjust screen brightness, tap and drag the slide
left or right. Tap OK when finished.
Input Method
Tap the inverted triangle to open the input method
pick list. Tap to select, on-screen keyboard, Graffiti2
and Penpower.
Input Enabler
Tap to enable and disable the selected input method.
Disabled input method will be denoted by a dimmed
icon and vice versa. Disabling the input method may
be useful when you are using drawing applications
such as Note Pad.
Message Alert
* Red blinking message alert icon will only be shown
if the wireless mode is ON and there is a waiting
message (e.g., SMS, MMS, or email). Tap the
blinking icon to open the message reminder which
shows the number of unread messages. This
message alert icon can only be dismissed after the
message has been opened.
- 13 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Network Status
Network Status icon has two displays:
when the wireless mode is OFF.
–
when the wireless mode is ON.
–
The number of green bars denotes the strength of
the radio signal. The greener the bar, the stronger
the radio signal. An orange triangle denotes the
availability of GPRS subscription. All Call Divert icon
will appear next to the green bar if it is enabled.
Tap to open the Network Status dialog box where
you can turn on or off the wireless mode, check
name of the mobile phone service provider, status
of roaming and GPRS and the status of Call
Forwarding. Yo u can also connect to the desired
network service at the Connection pick list. Tap OK
when finished.
Volume Control
Tap to open the Volume Control screen where you
can adjust the ringer volume, key and system sound
level. Receiver volume (i.e., volume of earpiece
during phone calls) can only be adjusted when the
wireless mode is ON. You can also mute the ringer
or select ringer behavior:
Ring
Vibration
All Off
– ring only
– vibration only
– No ring and no vibration
Ring & Vibration
– Both ring and vibration
Ring after Vibration
: When there is an
incoming call, your QDA-700 will vibrate for 6
seconds and then ring.
Tap OK when completed.
Input Area
Tap to toggle between showing and hiding the input
area.
Menu
Tap menu to open the menu bar.
Note: Press Camera Button to launch a simplified status bar while the flip is
closed. A simplified status bar is including Clock, Missed Call Alert, Ringer
Status & All Call Divert Icon.
- 14 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.5 Turning the radio On and Off
To cater for your different requirements and minimize power consumption, various
features (e.g., Date Book, Contacts, To Do List, Memo Pad, MP3 playback, Digital
Camera, etc.) of your QDA-700 can be used independently of the wireless features and
applications. The screen and wireless modes are designed to be turned on and off
separately.
Turning the screen on and off
- When the flip is closed: open the flip to turn on the screen, and vice versa.
- When the flip is opened: press the Power button slightly to toggle the on/off of the
screen.
Turning Wireless Mode On
Wireless mode allows your QDA-700 to connect to a mobile network so that you can
make and receive phone calls and use other wireless services (e.g., email, web browsing,
etc.).
To turn on the wireless mode, do one of the following:
l Press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds.
l Open the flip and press Dial Button once/twice. Then, tap On to confirm.
l Open the flip and tap the wireless mode icon in the status bar (at the top of the
screen). Tap Mobile: On at the Network Status screen.
Turning Wireless Mode Off
When wireless mode is off, your QDA-700 does not have a connection to any mobile
network. You can still use the organizer and other Palm OS features. This is ideal for
maximizing battery life.
To turn off the wireless mode, do one of the following:
l Press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds.
l Open the flip and tap the wireless mode icon in the status bar (at the top of the
screen). Tap Mobile: Off at the Network Status screen.
l Open the flip and press Dial Button, tap Menu (by pressing Menu Button) and
choose “Mobile Off”
* You are advised to switch off the wireless mode when you are in a hospital or in
an aircraft. The GSM radio frequency may interfere with medical instruments and
aircraft systems.
- 15 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.6 Making your First Phone Call
Before you make your first phone call with your QDA-700, please make sure:
1. The SIM card has been inserted.
2. The QDA-700 is fully charged.
3. The power lock is in the Locked position.
To make your first phone call:
1. Open the flip, press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds.
2. Allow your QDA-700 to complete an automatic network search which may take
several seconds. When it is completed, the network status icon appears in the top
toolbar.
3. If prompted for a PIN, tab to enter it on the PIN screen. If you do not know the PIN
number or have trouble with the PIN, please contact your mobile service provider for
help.
4. Tap on the onscreen phone pad for the desired phone number and press
to dial.
to clear the last tapped digit.
5. When necessary, press
6. When your call is complete, i) press End button , or ii) press Reject Button, or iii) close
the flip, to hang up.
Phone calls can only be made when you are in a wireless coverage area. If “No Service”
appears in the upper left of the screen, you are probably out of a wireless coverage area.
If you believe you are in a wireless coverage area and this problem persists, try turn
on/off your QDA-700 or contact your mobile service provider for assistance.
You can make an emergency call with or without a SIM card inserted, as long as your
QDA-700 is within GSM coverage. Wireless mode can also be turned on without inserting
a SIM card. A message “Emergency call only” displays on the screen. In this situation,
you can only make an emergency call by dialing international emergency number “112” or
the specific emergency number of your location. (Note: Some operations may require a
SIM card to be inserted before making an emergency call. Please check with your mobile
phone service provider for details.)
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the volume buttons on the side of your QDA-700 to
adjust call volume.
- 16 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.7 Resetting your QDA-700
Your QDA-700 is built to provide stable and reliable organizer and mobile phone functions.
In general, you do not have to use the reset button. Nevertheless, your QDA-700 may fail
to respond to an input on some occasions (e.g., poor program design of 3rd party
software). Performing a reset allows your QDA-700 to run again.
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset will instruct your QDA-700 to start again. No records or information (e.g.,
software, Contact entries, memos, etc.) will be deleted during a soft reset. The Welco me
screen appears after a soft reset, followed by the Date and Time Preferences screen (to
set date and time).
To perform a soft reset
l Perform a soft reset by using an unfolded paper clip or the stylus to gently press the
reset button located at the right side of your QDA-700.
Performing a hard reset
All records and entries stored in your handheld are erased after a hard reset. Never hard
reset your QDA-700 unless a soft reset does not solve your problem. Note: The data
previously synchronized with your computer can be restored on your QDA-700 during its
next HotSync operation.
To perform a hard reset
1. Hold the power button down on the top of your QDA-700.
2. While holding down the power button, press the reset button gently with an unfolded
paper clip or the stylus and release the reset button.
3. Only release the power button when the Palm Powered™ logo appears.
4. When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to
erase all the data stored on your handheld, do one of the following:
l Push the 5-way navigator to the top to confirm the hard reset and display the
Digitizer screen.
l Push the 5-way navigator to the bottom to perform a soft reset.
The current date and time are not affected during a hard reset. Format Preferences and
other settings are restored to their factory default settings.
To restore your data from a Windows computer after a hard reset:
1. Click the HotSync icon ™ in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of the
taskbar).
2. Select Custom in the HotSync Manager menu.
3. Select the username from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list.
- 17 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5. Click Change and select Desktop overwrites the handheld.
6. Changing the HotSync setting from the default only affects the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To use a new
setting on an ongoing basis select the Set As Default box. Thereafter, whatever you
selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default button in the
Custom dialog box.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9. Click Done to activate your settings.
10. Perform a HotSync operation.
- 18 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2. Input Method
The chapter illustrates several ways to input data (e.g. memo, address, etc) on your
QDA-700.
Available input methods include:
l
l
l
Onscreen keyboard
Graffiti 2 Handwriting
PenPower Handwriting
- 19 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.1 Using the onscreen keyboard
You can open the onscreen keyboard anytime you need to enter text or numbers on your
handheld.
To access the onscreen keyboard, open any application such as Memo and do one of the
following:
l
If the input area (also called graffiti area) is disabled, tap the icon in the status bar at
the bottom of the screen.
Tap here
l
If the graffiti area is enabled, tap abc or 123 to pop up the keyboard.
Tap here for
alphabetic keyboard
Tap here for
numeric keyboard
- 20 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To use the onscreen keyboard:
l Tap the characters to enter text and numbers.
When a keyboard is open, you can tap the abc, 123, or Int’l boxes to open any of the
other keyboards, including the international keyboard.
Alpha
Tap
Backspace
Caps lock
Carriage
return
Caps shift
Numeric
Tap here to display
alphabetic keyboard
International
Tap here to display
international keyboard
Tap here to display
numeric keyboard
After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in a record.
- 21 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.2 Using Graffiti 2 writing
With Graffiti 2 strokes, you can create letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols found
on a standard keyboard.
The Graffiti 2 demo shows how to use the handwriting software. The first time you turn on
your QDA-700, or perform a hard reset, the Welcome application will automatically guide
you through the setup process. When you complete the setup, you will be invited to learn
how to use your handwriting software.
It is advised that you try the demo if Graffiti 2 is new to you. After you view the Welcome
application the first time, a Graffiti 2 icon will appear in System folder in Launcher II
screen. Tap on this icon to view the demo at any time.
To access Graffiti 2 help from an application
1. Tap on an editable text field.
2. Tap the Menu icon .
3. Sele ct Graffiti 2 Help from the Edit menu.
General Guidelines for Graffiti 2 Writing
Follow these guidelines to learn and use Graffiti 2 writing strokes successfully:
l
The heavy dot on each shape indicates where to start the stroke. Always start the
stroke at the heavy dot. Please note that some characters have similar shapes but
different starting and ending points. (Do not draw the heavy dot; it is there only as a
guideline.)
l
The Graffiti 2 writing strokes for letters closely resemble letters of the standard
English alphabet, both upper case and lower case and include symbols made with a
single stroke and symbols made with multiple strokes.
l
For multi-stroke characters, a temporary character is displayed after the first stroke
to show that the stroke was recognized. For example, after the first vertical stroke of
“t”, a temporary “l” is shown. The temporary stroke will be recorded if the second
stroke is not drawn within a limited time window.
l
The text input area is divided into two parts for writing lowercase letters and for
writing numbers respectively. The small marks at the top and bottom of the text input
area define the division line. To have your QDA-700 recognize letters and numbers,
you must begin letter strokes on the left side and number strokes on the right side of
the text input area. Uppercase letters are formed by writing across the division line.
- 22 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Write
lowercase
letters here
Write numbers
here
Write uppercase letters
across these division
marks
Writing in Graffiti 2 input areas
You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the designated input areas (i.e., Graffiti area) and
also in full screen area.
Using Full-screen Writing
You can write outside the Graffiti 2 input area only when Graffiti 2 input method has been
selected and enabled (i.e., the input enabler icon is not dimmed); otherwise, you must
write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your QDA-700 to recognize them.
Functions of different screen areas:
l
l
l
Left side: write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc or ABC input areas
Right side: write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area
Middle of the screen: writing capital or uppercase letters
Draw capital or uppercase
letters in the middle
Draw letters on
the left side
Draw numerals on
the right side
Tap here to turn on and off
- 23 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
After writing a character, a quick tap on the screen is interpreted as a period character for
a brief period of time. This makes it easier to tap buttons and place the cursor witho ut
having the action interpreted as a period character.
Full-screen Writing is turned on and off by tapping the Input Enabler icon on the status
bar.
Graffiti 2 character set
Graffiti 2 alphabet
Draw letters on the abc and ABC writing area
Letter Stroke
Letter Stroke
Letter
A
h
O
Stroke
Letter
V
B
I
P
W
C
J
Q
X
D
K
R
Y
E
L
S
Z
F
M
T
G
N
U
Graffiti 2 numbers
Draw letters on the 123 writing area
Number Stroke
Number Stroke
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
- 24 -
Stroke
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Graffiti 2 Punctuation Marks and Other Special Characters
l
Period and comma punctuation marks can be written on either side of the text input
area (the letter or number side). Other common punctuation marks can be written on
one side of the text input area (in general, the more frequently used punctuation is
on the left side).
Tip: Samples of the character strokes are available in the Graffiti 2 Help file. To view the
Help file, Tap on Menu, choose Edit Menu and choose Graffiti 2 Help. Note that accented
characters appear on a Punctuation Shift screen but do not use the Shift command. To
write uppercase accented characters, write the letter across the division mark just as you
would do with an ordinary letter.
Using the Graffiti 2 Tuner
The Graffiti 2 tuner provides alternate strokes for making the T, P, Y, and $ characters. For
example, you may want to form the letter “T” by using strokes similar to a space and an
“L”. But if this technique is difficult to control, you can turn off this option.
To use the tuner:
1. Tap the Home icon on the status bar or graffiti area.
2. Tap Preference and select General Preference
3. Select Graffiti 2 Tuner from the pick list in the upper right corner of the screen.
4.
Tap on one of the letters available for you to tune:
- 25 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using Graffiti 2 Gestures
Gestures are editing commands, such as cut, paste, and the ShortCut command which
will be explained in the next section.
Using Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts let you quickly and easily enter commonly used words or phrases.
Graffiti 2 writing comes with several predefined ShortCuts. You can also create your own,
for any words, letters, or numbers.
You can create ShortCuts, with up to 45 characters, using the ShortCut preferences. For
example, you could create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. All
ShortCuts you create appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen and are
available in any of your QDA-700 applications. ShortCuts are backed up on your
computer when you perform a HotSync® operation.
Your QDA-700 includes the following predefined Graffiti 2 ShortCuts for common entries:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
ds—Date stamp
ts—Time stamp
dts—Date/time stamp
me—Meeting
br—Breakfast
lu—Lunch
di—Dinner
To use a shortCut:
Draw the ShortCut stroke, followed by the ShortCut character or characters.
When you draw the ShortCut stroke, the ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point.
To create a shortCut
1 Tap the Home icon on the status bar or graffiti area.
2 Tap Preference and select General Preference.
3 Tap ShortCuts in the pick list in the upper right corner.
4 Tap New .
5 Enter the letters you want to use to activate the ShortCut in the ShortCut Name line of
the ShortCut Entry screen.
6 Tap the ShortCut Text area, then enter the text that will appear when you write the
ShortCut characters.
7 You can add a space character after the last word in your ShortCut text, so that a
space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
8 Tap OK.
- 26 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tap new
To edit a ShortCut
1. In the ShortCut Preferences screen, tap the ShortCut you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Make the changes you want, then tap OK.
To delete a shortCut
1. Select the ShortCut you want to delete in the ShortCut Preferences screen.
2. Tap Delete, then tap Yes.
- 27 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.3 Using Chinese OS & Penpower Handwriting Application
In addition to using English with your QDA-700, you can read and enter traditional
Chinese characters after the Chinese system has been enabled. Furthermore, you may
use the popular handwriting method to input Chinese in addition to common input method
Changjei, Phonetic, etc.
Your QDA-700 comes with an English user interface and you must enable the 2 Chinese
software programs (Chinese OS and Penpower) in order to read and write Chinese
characters. Chinese OS should be enabled prior to Penpower. Both software programs
are already included in your QDA-700.
Chinese OS
Chinese OS is an add-on Chinese program for your QDA-700. Features include:
l Support read and input Chinese in most Palm OS applications
l Chinese localization of most system applications
l Input Chinese using on-screen Chinese keyboard (e.g., Changjei, Phonetic)
l Support HKSCS 2001 fonts
l Support Unicode
Enable Chinese OS
To read and input Chinese characters, the Chinese OS application must be enabled.
Once the Chinese OS has been enabled, it will remain in the memory of your QDA-700.
Therefore, you are not required to open the Chinese OS main screen to enable it.
If you have selected and installed CHOS during the first run, please proceed to
“General Options”
To enable Chinese OS
1. Tap All folder in Launcher II and select Chinese OS icon. The main screen for
Chinese OS displays
2. Tap and enable the checkbox next to Enable Chinese OS
3. Tap OK
- 28 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
General Options
Chinese OS allows you to customize the settings in General Options. Chinese OS must
be enabled first.
To set General Options
1. On the Chinese OS main screen, tap General Options
2. In General Options, the following settings are available:
Language
Tap the left portion to display Chinese in
Traditional Chinese characters. Tap the right
portion to display Chinese in Simplified Chinese
characters.
Note: Traditional Chinese is commonly used in
Hong Kong and Taiwan, while simplified Chinese
is commonly used in the PRC.
Sort by
Chinese OS can sort data according to this setting.
Available options include Encoding, Strokes,
Phonetic. You can also disable this feature.
Find Chinese Records
When enabled, Chinese searching will be
included in the Find function. (It is recommended
you enable this setting)
More Font
Chinese OS supports 3 font types by default and it
will support up to 4 font types if this setting is
enabled.
Hide Underline
Hide the dotted line under the text field.
Bold Small Bold Chi. Font
Bold Chinese characters also small bold English if
font type (10 points) is selected.
Bold Large Bold Chi. Font
Bold Chinese characters also large bold English if
font type (larger than 10 points) is selected.
Auto Enable After Reset
Automatically enables and resumes Chinese OS
after a system reset. If this setting is not enabled,
you will see a message about enabling Chinese
OS after a system reset.
Disable Smart Conversion
Access Fonts in Card
Accesses and displays the font type stored in the
SD/MMC memory card.
Avantgo Fix
Fixes messy Chinese character displays in
Avantgo application.
Tap OK when finished.
- 29 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Keyboard Options
Chinese OS allows you to customize keyboard settings in Keyboard Options. Chinese
OS must be enabled first.
To set Keyboard Options
1. On Chinese OS main screen, tap Keyboard Options
2. In Keyboard Options, the following settings are available:
Enable Chinese Keyboard
Toggle the Chinese keyboard for input. Please refer
to later section for details.
Lookup
You can input a Chinese character and then make
use of this lookup to query the input code in another
input method. This setting is to select the input
method being queried.
Show Virtual Keyboard
Toggle onscreen Chinese keyboard display. You may
disable this setting to view more text.
Show Number for Hints
Show numbers corresponding to characters.
Enable Inline Chinese Input Enable Chinese input (Please refer to later session
for details)
Toggle Chi/Eng
Select how to switch between Chinese and English
input.
Select IME
Setup how to select Chinese input method.
Careless Input
Input Chinese by capital letters if enabled. You may
disable this setting if you use keyboard to input
Chinese. Graffiti users should enable this setting.
Show Hint
Show the character selection even when only a
partial input code has been entered.
- 30 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Send Code
Select and output a Chinese character if there is only
one character qualified for the input code.
Insert Space
Insert a space
automatically.
Enable Phrase Input
If enabled, related and relevant word(s) will be shown
for selection after a character has been input.
between
Chinese
characters
Tap OK when finished.
User Interface Localization
Chinese OS can localize some system applications to Chinese display. Chinese OS must
be enabled first.
To localize the user interface
1. On Chinese OS main screen, tap Localize User Interface
2. Tap OK when finished
The user interface of some system applications (e.g., Address Book, Memo Pad, To Do
List, etc.) will be changed to Chinese display.
Input Chinese
The easiest method to input Chinese in your QDA-700 is via the onscreen Chinese
keyboard. To use the Chinese keyboard, at least one Chinese input method must be
installed. By default, your QDA-700 has the following input methods installed:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Phonetic
PinYin
Changjei
Cantonese
Symbol
Quick
Please refer to previous session on how to enable Chinese keyboard.
To use Chinese keyboard, do one of the following
l Tap abc in the Graffiti area.
1. Tap menu and select Keyboard in Edit menu.
You can only pop up the Chinese keyboard when the cursor is in any editable field of the
applications.
To select a Chinese input method in Chinese keyboard
icon next to the Done button to pop up the selection list.
Tap the
Tap to select a desired Chinese input method. The keyboard layout will change
accordingly.
To input a Chinese character with Chinese keyboard
1.
2.
- 31 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.
2.
Tab the appropriate input code corresponding to the selected input method.
Select the desired Chinese character and output it to the editable field of the
application.
Inline Chinese Input
Inline Chinese input allows inputting Chinese without popping up the Chinese keyboard.
Enable Inline Chinese Input
You must enable Inline Chinese Input in the Keyboard Options of Chinese OS.
To enable Inline Chinese Input:
1. Tap Keyboard Options in the main screen of Chinese OS.
2. Tap to select Enable Inline Chinese Input.
Two new menu options will be added to the Edit menu of most applications.
To use Inline Chinese Input
in Edit menu to pop up the list of available Chinese input
1. Tab
methods.
2. Tab the desired Chinese input method.
3. Write the English characters corresponding to the input code on the Graffiti area.
4. Select the desired Chinese character and output it to the editable field of the
application.
To toggle between Chinese and English input
l Tab
in Edit menu to toggle the input between Chinese and
English.
- 32 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Penpower Chinese Handwriting Recognition
You can use Penpower Chinese Handwriting Recognition application to input Chinese
characters using conventional Chinese handwriting strokes.
Features:
l Full-screen input
l Input Chinese on Graffiti area
l Continuous writing with 2 input boxes
l Support both traditional and simplified Chinese, HKSCS, Kaiji, English and
symbols
l User-adjustable handwriting speed
If you have selected and installed PenPower during the first run, please proceed to
“Setting up Penpower”
Enable Penpower
Chinese OS must be enabled prior to Penpower. Both software programs are already
included in your QDA-700.
To enable Penpower
. The main Penpower screen
1.
Tap All folder in Launcher II and select Penp icon
displays.
2.
Tap
to enable Penpower. You will see a Please Wait message on the
screen.
Another pop up message about full screen writing displays. Tap OK to dismiss this
dialog and you can use Chinese handwriting in editable fields of most applications.
3.
To disable Penpower
1.
Tap All folder in Launcher II and select Penp icon
displays.
2.
Tap
screen.
. The main Penpower screen
to disable Penpower. You will see a confirmation message on the
- 33 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting up Penpower
On the main Penpower screen, there are different settings as follows:
Default input mode
You can choose to write Chinese for recognition using
full screen, Graffiti area and Input Tool.
Dynamic toggle method
Selected button will be used to toggle the Chinese
handwriting input method. Available options include
Calculator, Find, Datebook, Address Book, To Do List,
Memo Pad, Up button, and Down button.
You should choose Up button or Down button in this
setting. Up button and Down button correspond to the
Up and Down of the 5-way navigator.
Type of Recognition
Penpower can recognize frequently used characters
and rarely uses Chinese, Japanese, English, number,
symbol, etc. You may select individual type to enhance
the accuracy of recognition.
Weight of writing stroke
Tap to select the weight of writing stroke.
Writing speed
After you have finished writing the character,
Penpower will wait a short period of time before
recognition. Smaller value means a shorter waiting
time. If you write slowly, you should consider selecting
a larger value in this setting.
Acceleration
Not applicable in QDA-700.
Colour of writing stroke
You can select a color writing stroke.
Graffiti calibration
You can use this calibration tool to divide the Graffiti
area into 2 writing boxes to speed up writing and
recognition.
- 34 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Writing Characters
You can use Penpower for handwriting input only if
you are in any editable field of an application.
Input Mode
Penpower allows writing in full screen, Graffiti area
and Input tool:
Full Screen
It is a flexible method as you can write anywhere on the screen.
However, you must wait for Penpower to recognize your writing before you can
write the next character.
Note: The P1 at bottom-right corner denotes full screen mode.
Graffiti Area You can write the characters in both left and right sections of
Graffiti area to speed up writing and recognition.
Note: The P2 at bottom-right corner denotes Graffiti Area mode.
Input Tool You can write in the 2 boxes of the onscreen input tool to speed up
writing and recognition. Please switch the input mode to P3 before tapping
or
to activate the input tool.
Features of different icons in Input Tool
Cut
Copy
Paste
Tap
Insert a space
Insert a carriage return
Backspace
- 35 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Toggle between Input Mode
With Penpower, you can input characters in 3 modes as discussed in earlier section. To
toggle between these input modes, you can use the dynamic toggle method as set in the
Penpower’s main screen.
P1
Full Screen mode
P2
Graffiti Area mode
P3
Input Tool (tab
En
No handwriting input method (i.e., use the default input method)
or
to enable)
Character Substitution List
Whenever you find an incorrect character in your text, you can tab that character to pop
up the Character Substitution List and then pick the correct character.
If the correct character cannot be found in the list, you can tap
character and close the list.
to delete the incorrect
Continuous tapping
allows input half/full-sized number. Tapping
toggle half - and full-sized symbols.
- 36 -
can
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Introducción al programa Móvil
3. Phone Application overview
El programa Móvil le permite realizar y recibir llamadas, almacenar información sobre
sus contactos y guardar entradas de Marcación Rápida. Asegúrese de saber cómo
enncerder su móvil antes de leer este capítulo.
The Phone application allows you make and receive calls, store information about your
contacts and store Speed Dials. Be sure you know how to turn on wireless mode before
reading this section.
Para acceder al programa Móvil
To access the phone application
• Press Dial Button and you will see the phone screen with dial pad.
• Pulse el botón Marcar y podrá ver la pantalla del teléfono con el teclado numérico.
At the top of the dial pad is Status Bar where you can check the status of your QDA-700.
It is accessible in all applications.
La parte superior del teclado numérico es la Barra de Estado, donde podrá comprobar el
estado de su QDA-700. Está accesible en todas las aplicaciones.
Status Bar
(from left to right)
10. Home (i.e., Launcher II)
11. Time and Battery
12. Input method
13. Input enabler
- 37 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Message alert
Network status
Volume control
Input area
Menu
For details and usage of various items in the status bar, please refer to Chapter 1.4 First
Run.
- 38 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.1 On-Screen Soft Buttons
Three on-screen soft buttons Home
, Today View
and Menu
are located (from left to right) at the bottom of dial pad. Tap the on-screen
buttons to access their respective functions.
In dial pad, you can also use the 5-way navigator to access the soft buttons with
additional functions:
•
Push to the Left
Today View Today’s View summarizes your
today’s appointment(s) and due task(s) and
displays the number of missed call(s), new
SMS(s) and new MMS(s). Tap each line to
access the corresponding application to view
the items. Please refer to Chapter 3.7 Today
View for more details.
- 39 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
•
Push to the Right
Call History You can check various
call-related information here: Missed Calls
list, Received Calls list, Dialed Calls list and
All Calls list. Tapping the 4 icons will display
the list and you can tap on the call record to
view and call. Please refer to Chapter 3.5
Call History for more details.
•
Push Up
Speed Dial Your QDA-700 allows you to
store up to 45 frequently used phone
numbers with Speed Dial application. Please
refer to Chapter 3.6 Speed Dial for more
details.
- 40 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
•
Push to the Bottom
Contacts Contacts is where you store
names, addresses, phone numbers, and
other information about your contacts.
Please refer to Chapter 3.4 Contacts for
more details.
•
Press 5-way navigator
Most Recently Calls Most Recently Calls is the list of recently 10 outgoing calls. You
may push the 5-way navigator up & down to choose the phone number from the list and
press the 5-way navigator to dial the highlighted number.
- 41 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.2 Dialing calls
Your QDA-700 offers several options for making phone calls. As you get familiar with your
QDA-700, you’ll discover which method you prefer.
Dialing with Dial Pad
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Tap on the dial pad for the desired phone number.
to dial. If necessary, press
3. Press
digit.
4. During the phone call, the following screen displays;
to clear the last tapped
Phone number and call duration are displayed in this call-in-progress screen. If the called
number matches a record in Contacts, the corresponding name will display. Otherwise,
Unknown will be displayed.
You can tap on the call-in-progress screen to get “Active Call Details” about the call. Tap
Save Button to save the phone number to Contacts. Tap Done Button to exit this screen.
4. Tap Speaker On/Off to enable/disable the Speaker Phone feature.
5. To end the call, press Reject Button, or close the flip. You can also hang up by tapping
the End button in the call-in-progress screen.
Note:
a. Long press
to input “+”
b. The display will be turned off for power saving automatically. While the
display is off, press Power Button or Dial Button to turn it on again.
- 42 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Dialing by contact name
Prior to dialing a call by contact name, you must create some contacts, or import them
from your computer with a HotSync operation or from your SIM card. The first time you
display Contacts, QDA-700 will ask if you would like to import any numbers from your SIM
card into your Contacts list.
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the bottom to access the Contacts.
3. Do one of the following to locate the contact you want to call;
l Scroll up and down by tapping the scroll bar at the right hand side
l Pop up the input area and write either of the following;
i.
First initial and last name.
ii.
First name.
iii.
Last name.
4. Choose the desired contact.
5. Tap Menu and choose Dial.
6. Choose the number to dial and press Dial.
To start another search, delete the letters you’ve entered. Or, just press Dial Button and
push 5-way navigator to the bottom to start again.
Or you can enable Tap Dialing in Address Book, so that you can dial the number
immediately after you have located the contact.
To enable and use tap-dialing:
1. In Contacts, tap Menu and choose Options menu.
2. Choose Preferences and select “Enable Tap-Dialing.”
3. Tab OK.
After tap-dialing is enabled, locate the contact and do one of the following;
l Tap the telephone number (instead of tapping the contact name) and choose
the number to dial.
l Press Dial Button and choose the number to dial. (Your QDA-700 will simply
dial the phone number without asking you to select the phone number if there is
only one phone number in the contact).
Dialing with Speed Dial
Prior to using Speed Dial, you must create some Speed Dial entries. Please refer to
Chapter 3.6 Speed Dial for details.
To dial using speed dial;
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the top to access Speed Dial.
3. Tap the desired speed dial entry to dial.
- 43 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Redialing the last number you called
Do either of the following in dial pad to redial the last number you called;
l Press Dial Button to display the last called number, then press Dial Button again to
dial the number.
l Push the 5-way navigator to the right to pop up Call History and select from the
dialed calls list.
Using Dial Pad during Calls
On some occasions such as phone banking or using an automatic voice mail system, you
may need to input your selection or credit card number using the dial pad.
To use dial pad during phone calls;
l Tap the dial pad soft button located between the Home and Menu soft buttons.
To quit dial pad during phone calls;
l Tap the call-in-progress soft button located between the Home and Menu soft
buttons.
- 44 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.3 Receiving calls
Incoming calls can be received only when the wireless mode is ON and the QDA-700 is in
a GSM coverage area. For details about the GSM coverage area, please contact your
mobile phone service provider.
To answer a call
A. when the flip is closed, do one of the following:
l Open the flip (when “Pick up by flip open” is on)
l Open the flip and tap on the screen to pick the call.
l Press the headset button if the headset is connected.
B.
l
l
l
When the flip is opened, do one of the following:
Tap the onscreen Answer icon.
Press Dial Button.
Press the headset button if the headset is connected.
To reject a call
A. When the flip is opened, do one of the following:
l Press Reject Button.
l Tap the onscreen Ignore button.
B.
l
When the flip is closed, do one of the following:
Press Reject Button.
Note: If voice mail service has been subscribed to and activated, rejected calls will be
diverted to voice mailbox accordingly.
Call Waiting
If there is a call while you are engaged on another call, you can put the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call. You can also ignore the call and allow it to go to
voicemail.
To answer call waiting:
l Tap the 2nd call information to answer the call waiting.
The original caller is put on hold, and the new caller becomes the active caller.
To swap between 2 callers:
l Tap the desired call information to swap between the 1st call and the 2nd call.
To silence the ringer while your phone is ringing:
l Open the flip and tab the “Silent” button
When you silence the ringer, you can either answer the call or let it ring through to
voicemail.
Receive calls while MP3 music is playing
If there is an incoming call while MP3 music is playing, the music will be stopped & the
phone will ring. To answer the call, do one of the following:
• Tap the onscreen Answer button.
• Press the headset button if headset is attached.
The music continues playing but you won’t hear it during your call.
- 45 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.4 Contacts
Contacts allows you store names, addresses, telephone numbers, and other information
about your personal or business contacts.
Opening the Contacts
To open Contacts, do one of the following:
l Press the Dial Button to launch the dial pad, and then push the 5-way navigator to
the bottom
l In Launcher II, tap Phone and then select Contacts.
If it is your first time to open Contacts, QDA-700 will prompt you to import the contacts
from your SIM card to QDA-700. If you chose to do so, please insert your SIM card and
switch on the wireless mode.
Adding and using Contacts entries
The Contacts application stores names, photos, ringtones and address information of
your contacts.
Creating a contact entry
A record in Contacts is called an entry. You can create entries on your QDA-700, or you
can use Palm Desktop software to create entries on your computer and then transfer
them to your QDA-700 in your next HotSync operation.
Palm Desktop software also has data import capabilities that let you load database files
into the Contact on your QDA-700. See “Importing data” and Palm Desktop online Help
for more information.
To create a new contact entry
1 Open Contacts.
2 Tap New .
3 Enter the Last name of the person you want to add to your contact.
4 Tap the First name field to move to it.
5 Enter the First name in the field.
6 Tap Photo at the top right hand corner to import an image which is stored in your
QDA-700.
7 Tap Ringtone to choose a customized ringtone for the specific entry. Choose Reset
to restore the default user ringtone.
8 Enter the relevant information in the Company field if you want to be able to sort
Contacts by company name.
9 Enter other information in the related fields that you want to include in the entry.
10 Tap the scroll arrows to move to the next page of information.
11 Tap Note to attach a note to an entry. Enter the information you want in the text input
area and then tap Done.
12 Tap Done when you have finished entering information.
Your QDA-700 saves the contact automatically. It is a good habit to have a latest
backup by regularly synchronizing your QDA-700 with your computer.
- 46 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Viewing Details of a Contacts Entry
1 Tap the entry in Contacts List view. The entry appears in Contacts view.
2 Tap Done when you have finished viewing the entry.
Duplicating an Entry
You can make a copy of an existing entry, which can be helpful when you want to enter
multiple names from a single organization. If you duplicate a contact and do not edit the
name, the contact appears in the Contacts list as “<Last name>, <First name> Copy.”
To duplicate a contact, select a name you want to duplicate from Contacts.
1. Open the menu, select Record menu.
2. Selet Duplicate Address.
3. Edit the record as necessary.
Tap Done when finished editing.
- 47 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Selecting Different Types of Phone Numbers and Addresses
You can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that a contact entry
displays. Any changes you make apply only to the current entry.
1 Tap the entry that you want to change in the Contacts list.
2 Tap Edit.
3 Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change and select the new field type
you want.
Tap
Editing Contact Entries
You can change the type of information that appears in the Contacts list screen,
categorize an entry and hide an entry for security reasons. You can also delete entries.
1 Tap the entry that you want to change in the Contacts list.
2 Tap Edit.
3 Tap Details.
1
2
3
4
Select any of the following settings in the Contact Entry Details dialog:
l Tap Show in List and in the pick list, tap which type of phone or other
information you want to appear in the Contacts List screen.
l Tap Category and then tap a category in the pick list that you want to
assign to the entry.
l Tap Private to hide the entry when Security is turned on.
Tap Note to attach a note to an entry, enter information in the text input area, and
tap OK.
To delete an entry, tap Delete.
Tap OK.
- 48 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using Contacts SIM
You can this handy Contacts tool to access the names and numbers stored in your SIM
card and also transfer them to Contacts.
You can use Contacts SIM to view, copy, edit and export the contact information in your
SIM card.
To import SIM entries to Contacts
1. Press Dial Button to open dial pad and push the 5-way navigator to the bottom to
launch Contacts.
2. Tap Menu and select Import Phone Category in Record menu.
3. Tap Yes to confirm and Contacts SIM will check and retrieve the names and
numbers stored inside.
4. Tap OK to finish.
To delete an entry in SIM
1. Press Dial Button to open dial pad and push the 5-way navigator to the bottom to
launch Contacts.
2. Tap Menu and select Delete SIM Entry in Record menu.
3. Select an entry in the list and choose Delete to erase the entry in the SIM.
4. Tap Yes when finished.
Changing the Contacts Display
You can change how Contacts lists are sorted and you can add custom fields for entering
additional information, using preferences. You can also have Contacts display the last
category you selected each time you return to the application.
1. In the Contacts list or in Contacts view, tap the Menu icon.
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
1
2
Choose an option to sort Contact lists from the List By pick list:
Tap Last Name, First Name to sort alphabetically by an individual’s last name
and then first name.
Tap Company, Last Name to sort alphabetically by the company name and
then an individual’s last name.
Tap OK
- 49 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Rename Custom Fields
These custom fields appear at the end of the Contacts Edit screen. Rename them to
identify the kind of information you enter in them. The names you give the custom fields
appear in all contacts.
To rename custom fields:
1. Tap the Menu icon in the Contacts list or in Contacts view.
2. Tap Options, and then tap Preferences.
3. Tap Rename Custom Fields.
4.
5.
6.
Rename the fields.
Tap OK in the Rename Custom Fields dialog.
Tap Done.
Controlling the Contact Display on Returning to the Application
1 Tap the Menu icon in the Contacts list or in Contacts view.
2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences.
- 50 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3
4
Select an option in the Contacts Preferences dialog:
To have the Contact redisplay the last category you selected on returning to
the application, tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it.
To have the Contact display the All category on returning to the application,
tap the Remember Last Category check box to clear it.
Tap OK.
Making connections from Contacts
You can use the entries in your Contacts to launch applications that perform tasks such
as dialing a phone number or creating an e-mail or SMS message. Some of the
applications you can launch are included in your QDA-700, and others may be available
from third-party developers and are sold separately.
Tap-Dialing
You can use Tap-Dialing to select an entry and initiate a related task – Dial or SMS.
To make a connection with Quick Connect
1. Open the Contacts entry to which you want to connect.
2. Tap Dial on the screen or push the 5-way navigator to the right to open the
Tap-Dialing dialog box.
3.
Select the method you want to use to connect.
Tap-Dialing opens and initiates the related task. For example, if you tap a phone
number, Tap-Dialing turns on the wireless mode (if the wireless mode of your
QDA-700 is off) and calls the selected phone number.
- 51 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.5 Call History
Call History consists of different views showing calls dialed, received, rejected, or missed
and keeps track of the date and time of each call.
To view the Call History:
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the right to pop up the Call History screen.
To access different views of Call History:
l Tap one of the four icons on the screen as follows:
Missed
All
Received
Dialed
The corresponding call history will be listed with the following items:
l Contact name.
l Phone number.
l Call date (will only be shown if the call date was made on a different date to today).
l Call time.
Tapping the entry in the list will display the call details with the following options:
1. Re-dial this number.
- 52 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.
3.
4.
Delete this entry.
Confirm and return to Call History.
Transfer the details of this entry to Contacts.
To clear the Call History:
1. Tap the Menu soft-button.
2. Select Clear All in the Options menu.
Please be aware that this Clear All action will erase all the entries in the Call History. You
cannot delete a specific list (e.g. Missed Calls) while leaving other lists unchanged. If you
want to delete a specific entry in a list, you should open that entry and tap Delete icon.
- 53 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.6 Speed Dial
45 contacts can be assigned to the Speed Dial. Each speed dial entry consists of a
picture or an icon and a name or a number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in
the Speed dial view are derived from the Contacts. If the contact has a picture stored then
this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not have a stored picture.
Prior to using Speed Dial, you must create some Speed Dial entries:
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the top to access Speed Dial.
3. Tap the Menu icon.
4. Tap Options and then tap Edit.
- 54 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5. Or tap and hold any unused speed dial entry for 2 seconds to pop up the editing
screen.
6. Enter the name and phone number in the spaces provided and tap Done Button
to complete.
Or you can tap the Look up Button
Contacts, tap Add to complete.
to lookup the desired entry from
To dial using speed dial:
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the top to access Speed Dial.
3. Tap the desired speed dial entry to dial.
To edit a speed dial entry:
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the top to access Speed Dial.
3. Tap the Menu icon.
4. Tap Options, and then tap Edit.
5. Tap and hold any unused speed dial entry for 2 seconds to pop up the editing
screen.
6. Tap the Delete Button
to delete the speed dial entry.
To use speed dial in Dial Pad:
1. Press Dial Button.
2. Tap and hold the numeric key 1 to 9 for 2 seconds to dial the phone number stored in
respective speed dial entries. Your QDA-700 will dial the number accordingly.
Note: Phone number must be stored in corresponding speed dial entry in advance.
- 55 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.7 Today View
Today View provides you with a summary of the following:
n No. of appointments today.
n No. of tasks due today.
n No. of missed calls.
n No. of new SMS.
n No. of new MMS.
To access Today View
1. Press Dial Button to open Dial Pad.
2. Push the 5-way navigator to the left.
Tapping the items will open the corresponding application to view the items.
- 56 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4. Messages
The chapter illustrates several ways to send or receive messages on your QDA-700.
Messages can be send or receive via:
l
l
l
SMS
MMS
PalmSource Mail
- 57 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.1 Using SMS
The Short Message Servicing (SMS) application allows you to send and retrieve
messages via a connected GSM wireless device, such as a mobile phone. This gives you
a two -way paging functionality and an easy way to read and respond to messages that
have arrived on your wireless device.
To use SMS application
1. Tap the Messages icon in the Launcher II and select SMS icon.
Create a new SMS message
Each SMS message contains only 160 characters. Messages exceeding this limit will be
split into multiple messages. Split messages will be reassembled into a single message if
the recipient’s mobile device or SMS software supports this function.
To create a new SMS message
1. Tap New.
A New Message screen is displayed.
2. Tap To to look up the mobile number from Contacts.
3. Choose a recipient and tap Add.
You can enter the recipient’s mobile phone number in the To field manually.
4. Enter the message body.
The number of characters entered is displayed in the title bar.
5. Tap Send to send the SMS message immediately, or
Tap Outbox to save the SMS message in the Outbox. Messages in Outbox will be
sent at next manual SMS transmission.
- 58 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Sending and Receiving SMS Messages
You can send messages stored in the Outbox and receive new SMS messages
manually.
To send and receive SMS messages simultaneously:
1. Tap Send and Check in the SMS application.
After transmission, you will be prompted regarding the number of new SMS messages
received.
To send an SMS message stored in the Outbox:
2. Tap menu and choose Send in Message menu.
To receive a new SMS message manually:
3. Tap menu and choose Check in Message menu.
Understanding the SMS Application
The SMS application stores your SMS messages in 5 different categories:
Inbox
Incoming messages downloaded from your phone.
Outbox
Messages to be sent.
Trash
Deleted messages. A message can be restored from the trash to its
original category.
Archive
Sends messages to an archive.
Draft
Holds draft messages until you are ready to edit or send them.
- 59 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using the Inbox
If the first column is blank, the message has not been sent or it has only been read. A dot
indicates that the message in the Inbox has not been read. A check mark indicates that
the message in the Outbox has been sent.
The second column displays the phone number of the sender or the recipient. The third
column displays the first characters of the message or indicates the type of attachment.
The last column displays an icon according to the type of message:
4. No icon indicates that the message contains text.
A paper clip icon indicates that the message contains an attachment.
5.
6.
A puzzle piece icon indicates an incomplete message. This icon is replaced the
next time you retrieve the message with all of its parts.
Inbox menus
7.
Send: Sends all messages not already sent. If there is no message to send, a sound
is emitted.
8. Check: Retrieves messages stored in the phone.
9. Delete All: Moves all messages to the Trash category.
10. Empty Trash: Deletes all messages stored on the device. You will be asked to
confirm the operation.
- 60 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
11. Font: Changes the font used to display the list. It does not affect the font used in the
View or New message screen.
- 61 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Viewing incom ing SMS messages
To view a text message
(Text messages do not have any icon in the last column of the Inbox)
1. Select Inbox from the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the message.
3. The message displayed and the current message number and the total number of
messages are displayed.
After reading, do one of the following:
Done
Does nothing and returns to the list view.
Reply
Replies to the sender of the message.
Delete
Moves the message to the Trash category and asks for confirmation.
To view data messages in your Inbox
(A data message is indicated by a paper clip icon in the last column in the Inbox)
1. Select Inbox from the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the message.
3. Do one of the following:
n Tap Yes to add the data to the appropriate application.
n Tap No to view the raw data as a text message.
To view messages in your Outbox or Archive categories
1. Select Outbox or Archive from the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the message you want to view.
3. Tap one of the following:
Done
Does nothing and returns to the list view.
Edit
Edits the current message.
Delete
Moves the message to the Trash category. A confirmation screen is
displayed.
- 62 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To view messages in Trash
1. Select Trash from the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the message you want to view.
3. Tap one of the following:
Done
Does nothing and returns to the list view.
Restore
Restores this SMS message into its category.
- 63 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Working with draft messages
You can save your message as a draft message whenever you want. Draft messages will
not be sent until you edit and store in Outbox.
To store a message in the Draft category:
1. Create or open the message you want to store in the Draft category.
2. Tap menu and tap Draft on the Message menu.
To view or edit draft messages:
1. Select Draft from the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2. Tap the message you want to edit.
3. Tap Edit in the message view and edit the message.
4. Tap one of the following:
Send
Sends the message now.
Outbox
Moves the message to the Outbox to be sent later.
Cancel
Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the
Draft category. Tap Yes to keep your changes and return the
message to the Draft category. Tap No to delete the message.
Configuring your SMS application
You can customize the SMS application using the Preferences menu:
To customize the SMS application
1. Tap Menu and choose Preferences in the Options menu.
2.
Do one of the following:
Sort by
This pick list allows you to sort by Alphabet, Date, Phone
Number and Status.
Show Date
Click this check box to display the date in the list.
Alert Sound
Check this box to have an alarm ring when you receive a new
SMS message. Select the sound you want to play from the pick
list.
- 64 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Confirm Deleted Message
Check this box to receive a confirmation dialog
box each time you delete a message.
Delete After Transfer
When you select an SMS message with an
attachment, the attachment is transferred to the
corresponding application, then deleted.
Signature
You can add a signature to the end of a message
while creating or editing it.
SMS Preferences Details button
The following detail settings apply to current and subsequent SMS messages.
Leave Messages on SIM
Determines whether you delete the current message from
the SIM after it is downloaded to the SMS application. Only
the messages currently stored in the SIM card are affected.
Force GSM text
Determines whether to send 7-bit data or 8-bit data. Most
mobile phones use 7-bit data. Only 7-bit data is sent if the
check box is selected.
Services
Determines how the SMS message is transmitted over the
network. Only forced service will be used if selected. If a
service is preferred, the service will be used first and
switched to other services if necessary.
Return Receipt
Determines whether you receive a receipt confirmation
notice. Tap to select None or Requested.
Warn Over
Determines whether you receive a warning message if
multi-part messages exceed more than the specified
number of parts. Tap to select 1 part, 3 parts, 5 parts, 10
parts, 50 parts, Never warn.
- 65 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Expires
Indicates how long the server keeps attempting delivery of
a message. Tap the pick list to select from the following
options: 4 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month and
Max. Time.
Message Center
Indicates whether your handheld can obtain your mobile
phone service provider’s Message Center number directly
from the SIM card, or whether you need to enter the
number manually. Tap the pick list to select either Auto or
Custom.
Tap on Default to restore these options to original values.
- 66 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.2 Using MMS
MMS refers to Multimedia Message Service. Your QDA-700 is capable of both sending
and receiving MMS. An MMS application called MMS is included in your QDA-700 as an
MMS composer. The MMS application fully supports MMS SMIL and additional features
such as transition effects.
Key Features
l Compose, send and receive SMS /MMS.
l SMIL-based player for MMS.
l Integrated message box for SMS and MMS .
l WYSIWYG MMS composer for multi-slide MMS.
l Integrated media manager for image, animation, audio and video.
l Expansion card for media object and message storage.
l Configurable user preferences and MMSC settings.
l Provisioning support.
l Seamless integration for key device applications.
To open the MMS application
1. Tap Messages icon in Launcher II.
2. Tap the MMS icon.
When the program starts, it will take you to your message folders.
To select message folder
1. Tap the folder pick list on the top-right of the screen. Pre-defined folders include:
Drafts
Stores work (messages) -in-progress.
Inbox
Stores received messages.
Outbox
Stores messages that are currently being sent, or those that were
unable to be sent.
Sent:
Stores messages that have been successfully sent.
- 67 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To create a new MMS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tap New to open the compose MMS screen.
In To field, enter the mobile phone number or email address of the MMS recipient.
You can also tap the To button to select between email or phone directory. Choose
the desired recipient and tap Add to close the directory and put the recipient’s email
or phone number into the To field.
Enter the MMS subject in the Subject field.
at the far right of Subject field to display the CC and BCC recipient field.
Tap the
Email or Phone directory are also applicable in these fields.
Tap the Insert Picture area under the Subject field.
Select the source of picture to be sent : Media Album (i.e., from photos stored in
your QDA-700) or Capture (i.e. from a Camera)
i.
From Media Album: Select the desired picture from the Select Picture window.
You can tap the location pick list at top-right corner of the screen to choose
between SD/MMC memory card and the QDA-700 expanded memory. Tap OK
when finished.
ii.
From Capture: Point your QDA-700 camera at your subject and make sure you
can see it on the screen. Tap Capture when you want to take the picture (Do
not press the Camera button at the left side of yo ur QDA-700 in this situation).
Tap Done if you are satisfied with the picture or tap Capture Again to capture
another picture.
- 68 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.
8.
Tap Insert Text area under the Insert Picture area.
You can enter your own message by selecting Custom or use a previously saved
message by selecting Canned.
i.
Custom Text: enter your own text in the space provided, tap Done when
finished. Tap Save if you want to save this message as a canned message for
future use. Tap Canned if you want to insert a canned message into your
custom message.
ii.
Canned: Select the canned message from the list and tap OK to finish. You
can create a new canned text by tapping New .
9. Tap the Insert Audio area under the Insert Text area.
10. Select your audio source between Album and Record:
i.
Album: Select audio file from your QDA-700. You can tap the location pick list
at the top-right corner of the screen to choose between SD/MMC memory card
and the QDA-700 expanded memory. Tap OK when finished.
ii.
Record: Tap this to record a new audio file for sending. Tap the red record
button to start and tap the black stop button to stop the recording. You should
position the microphone of your QDA-700 to the sound source directly and
closely to ensure recording quality. Tap Done when finished or tab Record to
start recording again.
11. Tap Send to send the MMS immediately.
Tap Done if you do not want to send the MMS immediately. You will be prompted to
save the MMS.
Tap Preview If you want to preview the MMS first. Tap Done when finished.
- 69 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Manage Slide in MMS
You can add more slides to your MMS so that it resembles a mini-movie.
To add slides
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tab menu and select Add in Slide menu. The number of total slides at top-right
corner of the screen increases by 1, i.e. totally you have 2 slides in the MMS.
3. Repeat steps 5-10 in the previous session to insert picture, text and audio.
To delete slides
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tab menu and select Delete in Slide menu. The number of total slides at top-right
corner of the screen decreases by 1. The contents in the deleted slide will disappear.
To change background color
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tap menu and select Background in Slide menu.
3. Select a color from the palette and tab OK when finished.
To change the duration between slides
1. Open your MMS message and select the slide you want to change the duration of.
2. Tap menu and select Duration in Slide menu.
3. Tap the Duration pick list to select the length of time.
4. Tap OK when finished.
You can set different durations for each slide in the MMS. Repeat the above steps to
change the duration of each slide if necessary. Default duration of each slide is 5
seconds.
To manage the sequence of the MMS Slides
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tap menu and select Manage Slides in Slide menu.
3. Drag and drop the slides to rearrange the sequence.
4. Tab OK when finished.
To clear specific content in MMS slides
In addition to deleting a slide in the MMS, you can choose to clear the specific content in
an MMS slide:
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tap menu and select Clear Picture, Clear Text or Clear Audio in Slide menu.
The selected item disappears.
- 70 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To set MMS send options
1. Open your MMS message.
2. Tap menu and select Send Options in Options menu.
3. Uncheck the Send message now if you want to manually set the date and time that
you wo uld like the message sent.
4. From the Expiration pick list, select how long you would like the message to be
stored on the server. The server will stop attempting to deliver the message after the
set time expires.
5. Set the message priority from the Priority pick list.
6. Check the Delivery Report checkbox if you want to be notified of the delivery status.
7. Tap Done when finished.
To View an MMS message
Whenever you have received a new MMS message, QDA-700 will notify you and allow
you to view it immediately, or view it later if you are occupied by something else or
dismiss the dialog.
To view a new incoming MMS immediately:
l Tap View .
MMS application will connect and try to download your new MMS.
To view the new incoming MMS later:
l Tap View Later .
The dialog will disappear. To view this MMS later, you have to initiate the MMS download
manually.
To view MMS message and message information
1. Select a MMS in the message folder.
2. Tap the message to view, or tap menu and choose Message Information in MMS
menu.
3. The message information (e.g., recipient, subject, duration, size, etc.) of the
selected message displays.
4. Tap Download if you want to download and view this MMS message.
Setting MMS Preferences
1. Tap menu in the folder view of the MMS application.
2. Choose Preferences in Options menu.
3. Set picture quality in the Photo Resolution pick list.
4. Change MMS connection setting in Connection pick list. Generally you do not need
to change this setting.
5. Select the default storage media by selecting the Message Storage pick list.
6. Tap Done when finished.
- 71 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.3 Using PalmSource Mail
PalmSource Mail is a stand-alone email client for your QDA-700 and optimized for a
mobile environment. It does not require any proxy server and enables users to access
both personal and company email from the office and on the road*. Integration with email
redirector technology from Visto, Inc. provides an out-of-the-box user experience to gain
access to corporate email servers, such as Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino
behind a firewall. Support for POP3, IMAP4 and SMTP enables wireless connections to
email solutions such as Microsoft Exchange, Novell GroupWise, Lotus Domino, iPlanet
and Sun ONE messaging servers, as well as portal and ISP-based email such as Yahoo
or Earthlink.
You can decide to download only message headers or parts of the message and access
the full text of the message at a later time. Sending and receiving attachments are also
supported, including hand-off native file documents to dedicated document viewers. In
addition, filters can be configured to download specific messages based on To, Cc, From,
Subject, Date information or message size.
* In addition to PalmSource Mail in your QDA-700, you may need an activated e-mail
account with a GSM/GPRS data service.
Open PalmSource Mail
To use PalmSource Mail
l Tap Messages icon in the Launcher II and choose PalmSource Mail.
If there is no mail account defined in PalmSource Mail, a message window will pop up
and remind you to create the mail account.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
With PalmSource Mail, you can have up to 8 accounts on your QDA-700 to access e-mail
accounts from providers such as MSN or Yahoo; to access your corporate e-mail with the
appropriate mail server configuration or to synchronize e-mail messages with a desktop
e-mail application (optional desktop software may be required).
For the sake of simplicity, only the setup for POP email account (i.e., the most common
email account provided by an ISP) will be discussed in this manual.
To create a new mail account
Note: You may need to check with your ISP about the login and server setting first.
1.
Tap OK in the above message window, or tap menu and choose Manage Accounts
in Options menu. A new window Account Setup will be displayed.
2.
Tap Account Type in the pick list and select POP.
3.
Enter your email address and account name (i.e., your full name) in the appropriate
space.
4.
Tap Next and proceed to the Incoming Mail window.
5.
Enter the address of the POP server.
6.
Enter the username (i.e., login name).
7.
Tap Unassigned next to Password. Enter your password in the Password Entry
window and tap OK to confirm.
- 72 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Tap Advanced POP Settings if you need to change the following settings:
l Server Port.: Default setting: 110.
l APOP authentication: Check this box to use secure authentication with this
account, if your ISP supports it.
l Use SSL: Enable this setting only if your POP server supports Secure Sockets
Layer. The default port for POP over SSL is 995.
l Leave mail on server: Check this box to leave a copy of mail on the server
after downloading. This is useful when you check email for this account from
another device, such as a personal computer.
l Remove deleted mail from server: Check this box to remove messages that
you have deleted from QDA-700 also from the server the next time you check
mail from this account.
l Max. message size: Enter the maximum amount of data to be downloaded per
message in this account. Messages larger than the maximum size will be
truncated at the limit you set. Set this value to 0 if you do not want to limit the
maximum message size.
Tap Next to proceed to Outgoing Mail window.
Enter the SMTP server address (e.g., smtp.myisp.com).
Enter your first and last names in Name.
Tap and enable the BCC a copy to and enter the destination email address if
required. BCC refers to “blind carbon copy”.
Tap Advanced SMTP Settings if you need to change the following settings:
l Server Port.: Default setting: 25.
l Use SSL: Enable this setting only if your POP server supports Secure Sockets
Layer. The default port for SMTP over SSL is 465.
l Use authentication: Check this box to use SMTP authentication with this
account, if your ISP supports it.
l Username: If you checked Use authentication above, enter the SMTP server
username supplied by your ISP. Normally your SMTP server username is the
same as your POP or IMAP username.
l Password: If you checked Use authentication above, tap to enter the SMTP
server password supplied by your ISP. Normally your SMTP server password is
the same as your POP or IMAP password.
Tap Next to proceed.
Tap Account Preferences if you want to set the account preference in detail.
Normally you are not required to set such preferences. Please refer to later session
for details.
Repeat these steps if you want to create additional mail accounts.
Once you have finished the mail account setting, the Inbox of PalmSource Mail will be
displayed.
- 73 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Edit mail accounts
You may edit your mail account information whenever required.
To edit your existing mail account
1. Tap menu and choose Manage Accounts in Options menu.
2. Tap to select the mail account which you want to edit.
3. Tap Edit.
PalmSource Mail displays the same screens as you see when setting up a new mail
account. Please refer to previous session for the settings.
Delete a mail account
Note: Removing a mail account also deletes all mails (stored in your QDA-700)
associated with that account. The account stills exists on the mail server.
You must have at least one account before you can delete the mail account.
To delete a mail account:
1. Tap menu and choose Manage Accounts in Options menu.
2. Tap to select the mail account which you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete.
4. Tap Delete if you understand and want to delete the mail account.
Retrieving, sending and managing mail
This section will guide you how to retrieve, send and manage yo ur mails. You can
manage the mails in your mail accounts by putting them into folders, deleting unwanted
junk mail, marking the mails as read or unread, etc.
Retrieving your mails
With PalmSource Mail, you can select to retrieve the message headers (i.e., sender,
subject, date, time, etc.) and download the full message later. If you select to retrieve the
entire message, the message body text will be retrieved up to the maximum message
size you have set (by default, the maximum message size to download is 16KB).
To select the mail account
Before you start to download the mail from your mail account, you should choose the
desired mail account to work with (if you have set up more than 1 mail account).
l Tap the Mail Account pick list at the top of the screen.
To retrieve mail message
You can choose to download the message header only or the entire message when you
get the mails.In addition, you can select to use message filters.
1. Tap Get in the Inbox view, or tap Get/Send if you have mail(s) to be sent from
Outbox.
2. Tap Headers Only if you want to read the message headers before getting the
entire message.
3. Tap Use Filters if you want to apply mail filters when redeiving your messages. Mail
filters are rules that you create to automatically limit message retrieval and what to
do when the mail arrives. Please refer to later section for details.
4. Tap Receive to start the retrieval process. Your QDA-700 come online according to
your settings and a dialog shows the checking process.
5. Another dialog displays the number of new mails. Tap OK to dismiss and your mail
list will show in the Inbox.
- 74 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
The total number of mails and the number of unread mails are shown at the bottom of the
screen.
The icon in front of the mail subject denotes the type of mail: partially downloaded, fully
downloaded and file attached.
Scheduled Sync your mail
You can instruct PalmSource Mail to check for new message on a pre-defined regular
schedule in a mail account. You will be notified if a new message was downloaded. You
can select to check all mail accounts or selected ones.
If you are using your QDA-700 when a Scheduled Sync is set to begin, you will be given a
choice to go ahead and sync, cancel the sync, or postpone the sync until later.
If your QDA-700 is asleep (not turned off), Scheduled Sync will wake your QDA-700 up
and sync.
To set up Scheduled Sync
1. Tap menu and select Scheduled Sync in Options menu.
2. Select Enable Scheduled Sync checkbox.
3. Set schedule options:
Sync Account(s)
Tap Sync All Account settings to select the mail
account you want to sync. By default, all existing mail
accounts are selected.
4.
Sync every
Tap this pick list to select the sync interval, from 15
minutes to once per day.
Sync time
Tap and enter the start time hour and minute. Then tap
OK.
Days
Tap whether you want the schedule to be active on
weekdays only or everyday.
Tap OK
- 75 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Preferences
A.
Account Preferences
i.
Confirm Deletions: PalmSource Mail will prompt you for confirmation
before deleting a message.
ii.
Include Binary Attachment: Allows the retrieval of non-text message
attachments.
iii.
Mail to sync: Unread syncs mail that you have not read. All syncs all
messages.
iv.
Signature: Tap to enable Append signature to outgoing messages and
enter your signature in the space below. Tap Done when finished.
B.
Advanced Preferences:
i.
Auto Disconnect: Causes PalmSource Mail to disconnect after each
connection.
ii.
Disconnect on Exit: Causes PalmSource Mail to disconnect when exiting
the program.
iii.
Timeout: The number of seconds that PalmSource Mail will wait for a
server response.
iv.
Modem Wait: The number of seconds PalmSource Mail will wait before
transmitting or receiving information.
C.
System Preferences:
i.
Backup ALL Databases: Causes the PalmSource Mail databases to be
backed up during HotSync.
ii.
Time Zone: Select the time zone where you use the device. Message
timestamps will display in this time zone, even if your server is in a
different time zone.
iii.
Adjust for daylight savings: If daylight saving time is in effect, select the
check box.
iv.
One line message view: Select this option to view only one line of
information for each message.
Tap Done when you have finished the setting.
Mail Folders View
Mail Box view is the main screen of PalmSource Mail.
Pre-defined folders include:
Inbox
Stores incoming mails.
Outbox
Stores outgoing mails before sending.
Sent
Stores outgoing mails which have been sent.
Trash
All deleted mail will be stored in Trash until you select Empty Trash in the
Options menu. If you have accidentally deleted a mail, you may switch to
Trash to recover it.
- 76 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To view other folders
1.
Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
2.
Tap the folder you want to view.
To add / remove mail folders
To manage mail messages effectively, you can create new folders to store and categorize
them.
1.
Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
2.
Tap Edit Categories.
3.
Tap New to create a folder. Enter the new folder’s name and tap OK.
4.
If you want to change a folder’s name, tap to select the folder from the list. Tap
Rename and enter the new folder’s name. Tap OK when finished.
5.
To delete a folder, tap to select the folder from the list. Tap Delete to delete the
folder immediately.
Compose your mail
To compose a new mail
1. Tap New.
2. Enter the email address of the recipient. The To field expands to two or more lines
during entry for addresses longer than one-line display. The To field will collapse to
one-line display again after you have finished entering the email address.
Please type a semicolon between email addresses if more than one email is being
sent.
You can also add a recipient address by looking up the Address Book:
i.
Tap the icon at the left of To field to expand the recipient list.
ii.
Tap the magnifier icon at the right to pop up the Email directory window.
iii.
Tap the desired recipient and tap Add to confirm.
iv.
Tap the magnifier icon again when finished.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If you want to send cc and/or bcc copies, tap the icon at the left of To field to expand
the recipient list. Enter the email address of the corresponding cc and/or bcc
recipient. You may look up the Address Book as in previous paragraph. Tap the
magnifier icon again when finished.
Enter the subject of the mail.
Tap -None- next to Attach if you want to send an attachment with the mail. Select
the files to attach in the Review Attachments window and tab Done when finished.
Compose your message body at the space below the subject line.
You can add your signature in your mail. Please refer to Preferences for setting.
Tap Send if you want to send your message immediately, your QDA-700 will go
online and send your message to your recipient at once. Or you can tap Send Later
if you do not want to send immediately and store the mail in Outbox. Message in
Outbox will be sent during the next Send or Get/Send process.
Modifying messages in the Outbox
You can edit, delete or move an Outbox message before it is sent. After the message has
been edited, you need to perform a manual send in order to send the message.
- 77 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Forwarding mail
You can forward received email to other recipients quickly.
To forward mail:
1. Tap the folder pick list and switch to the folder which contains your mail.
2. Open the mail by tapping the message title.
3. Tap Forward button.
4. Enter the forwarding email address in the To field.
5. You may enter additional text in the message body.
6. Tap Send to send immediately or Send Later to store the mail in the Outbox.
Replying to mail
You can reply to a mail as you are reading the message body or when viewing in folder
list view.
To reply to a mail:
1. Tap the message which you want to reply to.
2. Tap Reply.
3. Select Reply to Sender only or Reply to All. The address of reply recipients will be
automatically inserted in the reply message.
4. Select the Include Original Text checkbox if necessary.
5. Tap OK.
6. Enter your reply in the space below the subject line.
7. Tap Send to send immediately or Send Later to store the message in Outbox.
Working with Attachments
With PalmSource Mail, you can download, send and receive file attachments with your
messages in additional to mails with plain text.
Downloading file attachments
You can store the following attached files in your QDA-700 for future usage.
Types of file attachments:
PRC (.prc)
PDB (.pdb)
Palm OS applications that you can install and run on your
QDA-700.
Palm OS databases that work with Palm OS applications.
To download an attachment
1. Tap the message (denoted by an envelope icon with paper clip) with attachment in
the Inbox.
2. Tap the paper clip icon at the top of the screen. The name of the attachment
displays.
3. Tap on the filename again to store the attachment. A Transfer dialog displays and
asks if you want to accept the file. Tap Yes to accept and install the file to your
QDA-700, or No to cancel this operation. This returns you to the message screen.
Only .prc and .pdb files can be stored in your QDA-700. You will get error messages
if files of other formats are attempted.
- 78 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Deleting mail
You can delete your messages from any folder. Deleted messages will be placed in the
Trash folder until you empty the trash.
If you want to set “delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your
QDA-700” as a default setting, you can select the Remove deleted mail from server
setting in the Manage Account Options menu.
To delete mail
1. Open the message folder which contains your email.
2. Tap and select the box next to the message which you want to delete.
3. Tap menu and choose Delete Selected in the E-mail menu.
4. Tap Yes to confirm or tap No to cancel.
5. Tap Yes if you want to delete the message on the server also, or tap No if you don’t
want to.
Empty the trash folder
Deleted messages will accumulate in the Trash folder and take up valuable storage
space on your QDA-700. You are advised to empty trash periodically.
To empty trash
1. In list view, tap menu and select Empty Trash in the E-mail menu.
2. Tap Yes to confirm, or No to abort.
Marking mail as read or unread
You may want to mark your mail as read or unread from time to time. Opened messages
will be marked as read automatically.
To mark mail as read or unread
1. Tap the folder pick list and switch to the folder which contains your mail.
2. Open the mail by tapping the message title.
3. Tap menu and select Mark Selected Read or Mark Selected Unread in E-mail
menu.
Import Contacts record directly from a mail
When reading your mail, you can add or update email addresses in Contacts directly.
To add a new Contacts entry
1. Tap the folder pick list and switch to the folder which contains your mail.
2. Open the mail by tapping the message title.
3. Tap the human icon at the top of the screen.
4. Choose Add send to Address Book or Add all recipients to Address Book.
The contact information will be added in Contacts automatically.
- 79 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5. Preferences
The chapter illustrates ways to customize your QDA-700 preferences in the following
category:
l
l
l
Phone Preferences
General Preferences
Application Launcher Settings
- 80 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1 Phone Preferences
5.1.1
Call Divert
If you cannot answer incoming voice, data or fax calls, you can divert them to another
number such as your voice mail service.
Whenever you open Call Divert, your QDA-700 will connect with your mobile network
and check the current settings for voice call. If the wireless mode is not ON, your
QDA-700 will prompt you to turn it on.
After checking, the following screen displays:
You may choose among the 4 diverting alternatives for voice calls:
Busy
Divert calls if you are already on the phone.
No Answer
Divert calls that you do not answer within a specified time limit
(operator-dependent)
Not Reachable
Divert calls if your QDA-700’s wireless mode is turned off or if you
are out of coverage area.
Forward all calls
Divert all voice calls.
- 81 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To enable a call divert
1. Select a call type from the pick list
Once the call type has been selected, QDA-700 will check the latest divert status
with your mobile phone service provider.
2. Choose a divert alternative.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Write the phone number to which you want your calls to be diverted or look it up in
your Address Book. Tap OK to confirm.
5. Tap OK when complete.
To cancel a call divert, select a divert alternative and choose Off.
- 82 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.2
Call Settings
In call settings, you can set the call waiting setting and whether to display your caller ID to
call recipients.
Enable call waiting
If this setting is ON, you will hear an audible alert signal for a new incoming call while you
are already engaged in a conversation. To pickup the waiting call, tab on the screen to
connect.
Call waiting service is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Please contact
- 83 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
your mobile phone service provider for information.
Hidden Call ID when making a call
For certain reasons, you may not want to let your recipient know your caller ID (i.e., your
mobile phone number)
To hide your caller ID:
l Select On in the pick list.
Note: On some occasions (e.g., the recipient only receives calls from known callers),
you must show your caller ID to call recipients.
- 84 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.3
Ringtone
Various musical formats can be used as ringtones in your QDA-700. Supported formats
include:
l Polyphonic MIDI (.mid) (up to 64 polyphonic music)
l MP3 (.mp3) (up to 224kbit/second)
l WAV (music in wave format must be converted into .pdb format in your computer
before it is installed to your QDA-700).
In Ringtone Selection, you can select the default ringtone for all contacts in your
Contacts.
To set the user default ringtone:
1. Tap the desired ringtone from the list of available ringtones.
2. Tap Back to confirm the selection.
Before you can use a newly installed music file as your QDA-700 ringtone, you must use
the Ringtone Manager to
l Copy the selected music file to the default ringtone folder, or
To use Ringtone Manager:
l Tap Management button
To Copy or Link a music file to the default ringtone folder:
Default ringtone folder in memory card: /Palm/Ringtone.
1. Navigate to any folder which contains your music files.
icon will go up a level and tapping the folder name will go down a
Tapping the
level.
2. Tap the square box in front of your music file (QDA-700 will playback the music file
immediately so that you can hear without leaving the Ringtone Manager).
3. Tap Copy and choose Copy (recommended) in the pop-up again to copy the music
file to the default ringtone folder, or choose Copy As Link in the pop-up to keep the
music in the original location but build a link to the Ringtone Manager
- 85 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.
( Note: Removing the SD/MMC expansion card which stores the linked music file
will break the link, please use Copy to copy the music file to the QDA-700 internal
memory if there is available storage space.)
Tap Back to exit Ringtone Manager.
Tap here
To delete ringtone or music file:
1. In Ringtone Manager, navigate to any folder which contains your ringtone or music
files.
icon will go up a level and tapping the folder name will go down a
Tapping the
level.
2. Tap the square box in front of the your music file (QDA-700 will playback the music
file immediately so that you can hear without leaving the Ringtone Manager).
3. Tap Delete to delete the ringtone or music file.
4. Tap OK twice.
To exit from Ringtone:
Tab Back to exit.
- 86 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.4
Display
You can customize the screen of your QDA-700 in Display Settings.
To change theme setting:
Tap the pick list and select the desired theme. Select other to view more themes visually.
To change Wallpaper setting:
Tap the pick list and select pre-installed wallpaper. Select other to view additional
wallpaper options.
To change Display setting:
Tap the list and select between Fill Screen and Stretch.
To change Text Color:
1. Tap the color bar to pop up the color chart.
2. Tap the desired color and tap OK to confirm.
To resume the factory default setting
Tap Reset and then OK
Note: All settings will only change after you have tapped the OK button.
- 87 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.5
Pick up Setting
In the Misc. category of Phone Preferences, you can customize the pick up setting for
incoming calls.
Automatic pickup
If this function is enabled, all incoming calls will be answered automatically without any
manual operation. This is beneficial if you have the headset attached to QDA-700 all the
time (e.g., when you are driving). You can also instruct your QDA-700 to connect the call
automatically after a definable period of time. Tap Edit in the pick list and choose the
desired time duration. Tap OK to complete.
Vibration
This is a shortcut of Volume Control. Please refer to Chapter 1.4 First Run for details.
Pickup by flip open
If this function is enabled, you may pick up the phone call by open the flip of QDA-700.
Network LED
If this function is enabled, the green LED for Network status will operate.
- 88 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.6
Security
Use this Mobile Security feature to prevent others from using your QDA-700 and to
control incoming and outgoing calls.
PIN Protect Mobile
If you want to be prompted to enter your PIN to turn on the
mobile, choose On. Otherwise, choose Off.
If you want to change PIN, choose Change PIN.
After you have changed the PIN to protect mobile setting, you
will be prompted to enter your PIN.
If you entered the PIN incorrectly 3 times, the SIM card will lock.
You must check with your mobile phone service provider in
order to unlock your SIM.
Call Barring
Lets you bar or block specific types of incoming and outgoing
calls.
For example, you can bar incoming calls when roaming, or
outgoing international calls.
The call barring settings are protected by the barring
password. The barring password is managed by and originally
obtained from the wireless service provider.
- 89 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Fixed Number Dialing Lets you limit outgoing calls to the numbers in your fixed number
dialing list (with some modifications allowed).
If you want to enable this feature, choose On, other wise Off.
If you want to edit your fixed number dialing list, choose Edit.
Use of Fixed Number Dialing requires a valid PIN2 security
code. You may need to check with your mobile phone service
provider for this code. If you entered PIN2 incorrectly 3
consecutive times, you will not be able to access Fixed
Number Dialing. You must check with your mobile phone
service provider in order to unlock this service.
- 90 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.7
Network Settings
Network Settings displays the name of the network carrier which your QDA-700 is
connected to and allows you to change the network searching mode.
The Search mode setting allows you to specify how QDA-700 will register with a network
carrier during mobile radio power-on. The following two options are available:
Automatic
The phone attempts to register with the home network (usually your local
mobile phone service provider) during mobile radio power-on. If the
home network is not available, the phone automatically attempts to
register with the next available network (if any). The phone attempts to
register with each available network until registration succeeds or
registration with each available network fails. The search order for
network registration is home network, preferred carriers and other
carriers, respectively.
Manual
The phone attempts to register with the home network during mobile
radio power-on. A dialog box listing all the available networks is
displayed for your selection, if the home network is not available.
To set your network search mode:
1. Tap the Search mode pick list and select Automatic or Manual.
2. Tap OK.
- 91 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To set your preferred network
Networks are listed in order of priority, with the highest preference at the top.
1. Tap Preferred.
2.
3.
Select the preferred network, and tab
and
(put icons here) to arrange the sequence for network search.
Tap OK to confirm the changes.
To add a preferred network
1. Tap Preferred.
2. Select a network carrier from the known networks pick list.
3. Tab OK twice to confirm.
If your network carrier cannot be found, choose Available Networks to select from the
networks which cover your location, or New Network if you know the Network ID
(Consult your mobile phone service provider as necessary)
To remove a preferred network
1. Tap Preferred.
2. Select a network carrier from the Preferred Networks list.
3. Tap Remove.
4. When prompted for confirmation, tap Remove again.
- 92 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.1.8
Information
In phone preferences, you can check the following information:
Phone and SIM
You can make use of this Phone setting screen to check phone related information of
your QDA-700.
To view phone and SIM information
l Tap Phone in Phone Preference screen.
The following information is shown:
Carrier
Name of your mobile phone service provider.
Number
Your mobile phone number. Some providers may not store your
mobile phone number in the SIM card and Unavailable may be
shown.
Service
Mobile phone service subscription.
GPRS
Availability of GPRS service.
Voice Mail
Availability of voice mail service.
IMSE & IMEI number
International Mobile Subscriber Identity assigned to your SIM
card.
IMEI Number
International Mobile Equipment Identity number of your
QDA-700.
- 93 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Firmware ver
Version of the mobile phone software in your QDA-700.
SMS Centre
Number of SMS centres usually saved on the SIM card. If there
is no number in the list, select Edit and enter the number, and
tap OK.
Meter
The call meter features let you keep track of the amount of time you spend on outgoing
and incoming calls.
Lifetime
Total amount of call time (including incoming and outgoing calls) for the life
of your mobile. (It cannot be reset)
Outgoing
Total time of outgoing calls since last reset.
Incoming
Total time of incoming calls since last reset.
Total
Total time of incoming and outgoing calls since last meter reset.
Last Reset
The date and time when last meter reset took place.
To reset the meters
l Tap Reset.
l Tap Reset again to confirm the meter reset, or Cancel to abort the meter reset.
Both incoming and outgoing call time will be set to zero at the same time. You cannot
choose reset either meter while leaving the other meters unchanged.
- 94 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Please note you cannot reset the Lifetime call meter.
GPRS Meter
The GPRS meter lets you keep track of the amount of information sent and received on
your QDA-700.
To check the GPRS meter:
l Tap GPRS Meter.
Latest Session displays the amount of information tracked (sent, received, and total)
during your latest or current session since your last reset.
All Sessions displays the amount of information tracked (sent, received, and total) on all
sessions since your last reset.
Last Reset displays the date and time you last reset the GPRS meter to zero.
To reset the GPRS meter
1. Tap the Reset button.
2. Tap Reset again to confirm.
All meters will be reset to zero (include Latest Session, even if you reset during an active
call).
After checking and resetting, tap OK to return to the Call Meter.
- 95 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2 General Preferences
You can customize the general configuration of your QDA-700 as follows:
Connection
Configure communication settings.
Date and Time
Set the date, time, time zone, and Daylight Saving switch.
Digitizer
Calibrate the screen (i.e., digitized) of your QDA-700.
Formats
Set the country default and the formats for dates, times,
calendar and numbers.
General
Set these features: auto shutoff interval, stay on in cradle,
sounds, alarm vibrator, indicator light, Beam Receive and color
theme.
Graffiti 2 Tuner
Fine tune Graffiti 2 to suit your style.
Network
Configure your handheld for use with a network.
Owner
Assign your name, phone number and other owner information
to your handheld.
ShortCuts
Define a list of abbreviations.
To access General Preferences:
l Tap Preference in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
- 96 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.1
Date and time settings
Setting the date and time
Date and Time Preferences enable you to set the time, date, time zone and daylight
savings setting for your QDA-700.
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Date and Time.
3. Choose Set Date box. Highlight the current year, month, and date, then tap OK to
confirm.
4. Choose Set Time box. Using the stylus, tap the up and down arrows to select the
current time and then choose OK to set the time.
5. Choose Set Time Zone box. Choose the time zone for your location, and then choose
OK to set the time zone.
6. Choose Daylight Savings pick list, then select On or Off.
- 97 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.2
Connection preferences
Connection preferences may have been set by your wireless service provider. Check with
your provider before changing preset settings.
To set connection preference
1. Tap Preference in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Connection.
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings used to connect
your QDA-700 to other devices. The screen displays a list of available configurations that
are ready to be further defined; the list varies depending on the kind of software you’ve
added to your handheld. You can also create custom configurations, which include the
following:
Standard Modem
A local connection using the built-in GSM modem in your
QDA-700.
Cradle / Cable
A local HotSync connection; the direct connection between
your QDA-700 and your desktop computer. Your QDA-700 is
connected by its Hotsync Cable to a USB port of yo ur desktop
computer.
IR to a PC/Handheld
A connection between the IR port of your QDA-700 and the
infrared device of your computer or laptop.
In addition, you will find a list of mobile carrier related WAP and GPRS settings in the list.
They are predefined to work with your local carrier.
Creating and editing GPRS connections
Important: Your wireless service provider may have set your GPRS connection settings.
Different settings may affect your service. Contact your wireless service provider before
using different settings.
- 98 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To add or edit a GPRS connection
1. Do one of the following:
To add: Tap New.
To edit: Tap the GPRS connection and tap Edit.
2. Do one of the following:
To add: Enter name and tap Details.
To edit: Tap Details.
Enter name of new
Tap Details
- 99 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3. Adjust settings.
Access Point Name
Opens a dialog box that allows you to change the address on the
GPRS network in which data is routed through to outside
networks–for example, a specific gateway to the Internet or a
specific WAP gateway.
Quality of Service
Opens up a dialog box that allows you to choose between using
the network default settings for quality service or customizing
individual settings.
NOTE The quality of service settings are only a request made to
the network. The network may or may not grant the level of quality
requested, depending on current network conditions and services
provided on an individual basis.
Header Compression Sets whether the GPRS data headers are compressed or not.
Compressing before transmission aids in increasing transmission
speed.
Data Compression
Sets whether transmitted data is compressed or not compressed.
Compressing data aids in increasing transmission speed.
- 100 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tap the box under Quality of Service and adjust settings.
Network Default
Sets the quality to what the GPRS network is currently providing.
Custom
Allows you to adjust individual quality settings.
Precedence
Changes the requested priority that your data receives in times of
network congestion. A higher priority results in privileged handling
of your data by the network.
Delay
Sets the requested maximum time it takes for your data to travel
through the network. Best Effort sets all data to be handled in a
first in, first out manner.
Reliability
Sets the requested level of acceptable data loss and timeliness of
data delivery that the network provides for data from the device.
l Class 1 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that cannot
cope with data loss.
l Class 2 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that can
cope with infrequent data loss.
l Class 3 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss and some interruption.
l Class 4 is for time and error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss.
l Class 5 is for time, non-error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss.
Peak
Sets the maximum rate of data sent through the network per
second.
Mean
Sets the requested maximum rate of data sent through the
network averaged over all of the data transmitted.
Tap OK twice to finish.
- 101 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Creating and editing GSM connections
Important: Your wireless service provider may have set your GSM connection settings.
Different settings may affect your service. Contact your wireless service provider before
using different settings.
To add or edit a GSM connection:
1. Do one of the following:
To add: Tap New.
To edit: Tap the GSM connection and tap Edit.
2. Do one of the following:
To add: Enter name and tap Details.
To edit: Tap Details.
Enter name if new
Tap pick list and select GSM
Tap Details
3. Tap the pick lists, select the settings and then tap OK.
- 102 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Speed
Sets the modem rate and protocol used for the connection.
Autobauding automatically negotiates the best modem rate and
protocol at the beginning of the connection.
Connection Element Sets the connection as Transparent or Non-Transparent.
Tap OK.
IR to PC connection
The following example shows you how to edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection to adjust
communication speed; you can similarly edit other connections or settings or create a
custom connection. You can use the IR to PC/Handheld connection to perform a remote
IR HotSync operation. To accomplish the HotSync operation, your handheld sends data
through its IR port to an IR port in your desktop computer, to synchronize with your
Desktop application.
To edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection
1. Tap the IR to PC/Handheld connection and tap Edit.
2. Tap Details
Tap Details
3. Tap the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed.
4. Enter the initialization string supplied by the documentation for the modem attached
to your mobile phone, if necessary.
5. Tap OK twice to save the configuration.
After you have created the configuration, you need to set up the HotSync Manager of
your Desktop application and the HotSync application of your handheld to perform a
modem HotSync operation.
- 103 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.3
Digitizer
The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. This is the same
screen that appears when you start your handheld for the first time.
You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset, or if your digitizer drifts.
To set the digitizer:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Digitizer.
3. Follow steps to complete.
- 104 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.4
Setting date and time formats
Format Preferences enables you to choose a number conventions based on geographic
regions. All the built-in applications on your QDA-700 use the Format Preferences
settings.
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Formats.
3. Set any of the following preferences:
Preset to
The standard number conventions for your country. When you select
a country, other Format Preferences are automatically set to that
country’s conventions. You can also edit each option individually.
Time
The time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock.
Date
The date format.
Week starts
The first day of the week (usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers
The format for numbers with decimal points and commas.
- 105 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.5
General
The General Preferences screen enables you to set the auto shutoff interval, alarm
options, sounds for your handheld and the Beam Receive feature.
To access General Preferences:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select General.
Auto-off delay
Your QDA-700 has an automatic shutoff feature that activates after a period of inactivity.
This feature turns off the power and backlight but leaves the radio on. This feature helps
conserve battery power in case you forget to turn off your QDA-700.
If you find that your QDA-700 shuts itself off before you have finished reviewing the
information on the screen, you should increase the time setting of the automatic shutoff
feature.
To set the Auto-off delay:
1. Tap the Auto-off After pick list.
2. Select the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature: 30 seconds, 1
minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes.
Cradle settings
You can choose to leave your QDA-700 on when it is in the cradle during a HotSync
operation or when you are recharging the battery, so you can continue to view your data.
To change the cradle setting:
1. Tap the Stay on in Cradle check box to leave your handheld on when it is in the
cradle.
System, alarm, and game sounds
- 106 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Your handheld uses a variety of sounds. The System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings
enable you to turn the sounds on or off and to adjust the volume level.
To set the system and alarm sounds:
1. Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level.
Important: When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the “chime” tones
associated with the HotSync operation.
2. Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level.
3. Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level.
The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to respond to
this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting.
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings
You can set alarms to remind you of important meetings or notes. When you enable the
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings, your QDA-700 vibrates and the indicator light
blinks to notify you of alarms. This is useful whenever you want to turn the Alarm Sound
off but still be notified of alarms.
To set the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings:
1. Tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off.
2. Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off.
Beam Receive
You can choose to turn off the Beam Receive feature. This prohibits anyone from
beaming information to your handheld. It also results in a slight saving of battery power.
To change the Beam Receive setting:
1. Tap the Beam Receive pick list and select On or Off.
Colors
You can change the color theme of QDA-700 to select a different set of predefined colors
for the screen.
To change the Colors setting:
1. Tap the Colors pick list and select. The new colors immediately appear on the
screen. You can repeat tapping the list’s various color selections until you find the
one you want to use.
- 107 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.6
Graffiti 2 Tuner
The Graffiti 2 Tuner enables you to select an alternate stroke shape for specific
characters.
To access Graffiti 2 Tuner:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Graffiti 2 Tuner.
To select alternate strokes:
1. Tap the letter you want to change.
2. Tap the check box to activate the alternate stroke.
3. Tap Done.
4. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for other letters.
- 108 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.7
Network Preferences
You can use your QDA-700 and the software that is included in the handheld operating
system to connect with Internet service providers (ISPs) or dial-in (remote access)
servers. You need an ISP account or corporate remote access account and a mobile
phone carrier account that supports dial-up connections or a mobile phone carrier
account with high-speed wireless data network services.
To use the e-mail or web browser software included with your QDA-700, you must create
a configuration in Connection Preferences and then create Network Preferences settings.
See “Connection Preferences” earlier in this chapter for a complete explanation of how to
define Connection configurations that enable your handheld to communicate with remote
devices.
After you configure both the Connection and Network Preferences, you can establish a
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection with your ISP or dial-in server. You can do this
either by using menu commands from the Network Preferences screen or by using a
third-party application.
Note: Some third-party applications may be incompatible with your new QDA-700. If you
suspect that a third-party application is adversely affecting the operation of your QDA-700,
contact the developer of the application.
To access network preferences:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Network.
Selecting a service
Use the Service setting to select the service template for your wireless service provider or
a dial-in server. Service templates are a set of wireless service providers and dial-in
server configuration settings that you can create, save, and reuse. Also, you can create
new service templates. See “Creating additional service templates” later in this chapter.
To select a service:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
Tap here to display a
list of service
templates
- 109 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.
Select the predefined service template you want to use.
Entering a username
The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log in to your wireless
service provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain multiple lines of text,
only two lines appear onscreen.
To enter a username
1. Tap the User Name field.
2. Enter your username.
Enter your username
Entering a password
The Password box identifies the password you use to log in to your server or wireless
service provider. Your entry in this field determines whether your handheld prompts you
to enter a password each time you log in to your network:
l
l
If you do not enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Prompt” in this field
and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure.
If you enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Assigned” in this field and
does not prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure.
If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do not enter a
password.
- 110 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To enter a password:
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Enter the password you use to log in to your server.
Tap here
3. Tap OK
The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”
Selecting a connection
Use the Connection setting to select the method you want to use to connect to your
wireless service provider or a dial-in server. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this
chapter for information about creating and configuring connection settings.
To select a connection:
1. Tap the Connection pick list.
Tap here to display a
list of avaliable
connections
2.
Select the connection you want to use.
- 111 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Adding telephone settings
Some services require a telephone number. When you select the Phone field, a dialog
box opens in which you define the telephone number you use to connect with your
wireless service provider or dial-in server. In addition, you can define a prefix, disable call
waiting and give special instructions for using a calling card.
To enter your server phone number:
1. Tap the Phone field.
2. Enter the phone number for your wireless service provider or dial-in server.
Enter the phone number
3. If you need to enter a prefix or disable call waiting, skip to those procedures.
4. Tap OK.
Entering a prefix
A prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line.
For example, many offices require that you dial “9” before dialing a number outside the
building.
To enter a prefix:
1. Tap the Dial prefix check box to select it.
Select this
box if you
need to use
a prefix
Enter your
prefix here
- 112 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
2.
3.
Enter the prefix.
Tap OK.
Disabling call waiting
Call waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are
connected. If your telephone has call waiting, you need to disable this feature before
logging in to your wireless service provider or dial-in server.
To disable call waiting:
1. Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it.
2. Enter the code to disable call waiting on the Disable call waiting line.
Each telephone company assigns a code to disable call waiting. Contact your
local telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
3. Tap OK.
Using a calling card
The Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your wireless
service provider or Intranet server. Keep in mind that there is usually a delay before you
enter your calling card number. When you define your calling card number, you need to
add commas at the beginning to compensate for this delay. Each comma delays
transmission of your calling card number for two seconds.
To use a calling card:
1. Tap the Use calling card check box to select it.
Select this
box to use a
calling card
Enter your
calling card
number here
2. Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line.
Note: The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long
distance services. However, because MCI works differently, MCI customers need to
put the calling card number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use
calling card field.
It’s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card number to
compensate for the cue delay.
3. Tap OK.
- 113 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Connecting to your service
After you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to
your wireless service provider or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.
To establish a connection:
- Tap Connect to dial the current service and display Service Connection Progress
messages. To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the lower
half of the Scroll button.
To close a connection:
- Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your QDA-700 and your service.
Creating additional service templates
You can create additional service templates from scratch or you can duplicate existing
templates and editing information. After you create a new or duplicate template, you can
add and edit settings.
To add a new service template:
- Select Menu, and then select New on the Service Menu.
An Untitled service template is added to the Service pick list.
To duplicate an existing service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Select the predefined service template you want to duplicate.
3. Select Duplicate on the Service Menu.
A copy of the service template is added to the Service pick list.
Adding detailed information to a service template
If you are using one of the predefined service templates, you probably need to enter only
your username and telephone number. If you are creating a new service template, you
may need to provide additional information to your wireless service provider or dial-in
server. Use the Details dialog box to add more information to a selected service template.
To add connection details:
1. Tap the service field.
2. Tap Details.
- 114 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Idle timeout
The Idle timeout setting defines how long your handheld waits before dropping the
connection with your wireless service provider or dial-in server when you switch out of a
TCP/IP application.
To set the Idle timeout:
1. Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options:
1 minute
Waits one minute for you to open another application before it drops the
connection.
2 minutes
Waits two minutes.
3 minutes
Waits three minutes.
Never
Maintains your PPP or SLIP connection until you turn off your handheld
(or until it times out).
By enabling this option, you may incur significant charges if the connection to your
wireless service provider is left open.
2. Tap OK.
Selecting Next Service
Next Service allows you to automatically try another connection method when the primary
method fails. If the current connection fails, then a connection to the selected service is
attempted. If you do not want to try another service connection, select None.
To select the Next Service:
Tap the Next Service pick list and select a service.
Defining primary and secondary DNS
The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating the
names of host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or IP
address) you are identifying a specific server that handles translation services.
- 115 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details dialog box, you
enter each section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a number
from 0 to 255; numbers are the only allowable characters in this field.
Ask your wireless service provider or system administrator for the correct primary or
secondary DNS IP numbers.
Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS. If you are not sure, leave the DNS
field blank.
To enter a primary and secondary DNS
1. Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field and then enter
the first section of the IP address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
Repeat step 2 for the second, third and last sections of the Primary DNS field.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary DNS number.
Tap OK.
IP address
Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP address),
whether permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP
address when clients log in. The IP Address field lets you identify whether your network
provides automatic (dynamic) temporary IP addressing.
If your IP address is permanently assigned, you need to get that information from your
system administrator. If you are not sure, select Automatic.
- 116 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To identify dynamic IP addressing
Tap the IP Address check box to select it.
Tap to select automatic IP
address
To enter a permanent IP address:
1. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent IP address field
below the check box.
2. Tap the space to the left of the first period and then enter the first section of the IP
address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.
4. Tap OK.
- 117 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Login scripts
A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server–for
example, your corporate network or your wireless service provider. A login script is
associated with a specific service template created in Network Preferences.
A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if
your company has a system in which you log in to the corporate servers from your
handheld using a modem or network connection. The script is generally prepared by the
system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It automates the events that
must take place in order to establish a connection between your handheld and corporate
servers.
You can create login scripts from the Login Script dialog box on your handheld accessed
from the Details dialog box in Network Preferences.
Tap here to see the list of
avaliable commands
Note: You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login script.
Creating a login script on your QDA-700
You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the
Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional
information. Those commands have a parameter field so that you can add the necessary
data.
To create a login script:
1. Tap Script.
2. Tap the End pick list.
3. Select the command you want from the Command list. If the command requires
additional information, a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the information.
- 118 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
The following commands are available:
Wait For
Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the
TCP/IP server before executing the next command.
Wait For Prompt
Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server
and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value.
You then enter the challenge value into your token card which in
turn generates a response value for you to enter into your
handheld. This command takes two arguments, separated by a
vertical bar (|) on the input line.
Send
Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you
are connecting.
Send CR
Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server
to which you are connecting.
Send User ID
Transmits the user ID information entered in the User ID field of
the Network Preferences screen.
Send Password
Transmits the password entered in the Password field of the
Network Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password,
this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay
Tells your QDA-700 to wait a specific number of seconds before
executing the next command in the login script.
Get IP
Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your
handheld. This command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt
Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter text of some kind
(for example, a password or a security code).
End
Identifies the last line in the login script.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.
5. Tap OK.
Plug-in applications
You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the
functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC
application that you install on your QDA-700 just like any other application. After you
install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in a login script.
Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:
l Written in C language
l Compiled into an executable device
l Called properly from a login script
l Able to return control to a login script after it terminates
l Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software, such
as Metrowerks CodeWarrior for Palm Platform.
- 119 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
For additional information on creating plug-in applications, send e-mail to Palm Developer
Support at [email protected]
Deleting a service template
There is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete command from the
Service menu.
To delete a service template:
1. Tap the Service pick list.
2. Select the service template you want to delete.
3. Select Menu and then select Delete on the Service Menu.
4. Tap OK.
Network preferences menu commands
The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to
create and edit service templates. See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for more information
about choosing menu commands.
l Service menu
l Options menu
l View Log : The Network Log lists all communication that occurs between your
modem and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the
Network Log can help your wireless service provider or your system administrator
pinpoint where the login procedure communication has failed and why.
- 120 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.8 Owner preferences
The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name, phone
number, or any other information that you want on your handheld. This information can be
from the business card created during installation. If you use the Security Preferences
screen to turn off and lock your handheld with a password, information that you put into
Owner Preferences is displayed the next time you turn on your handheld.
To access owner preferences:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Owner.
To enter owner information:
Enter the text that you want on your handheld in the Owner Preferences screen. If
you enter more text than can fit on one screen, a scroll bar automatically appears on
the right side of the screen.
If you assign a password to the Security Preferences screen, the information in the
Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button appears at
the bottom of the screen.
- 121 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.2.9
ShortCuts
The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering text.
This section describes how to create, edit and delete a ShortCut.
To access shortcuts preference:
1. Tap Preferences in Launcher II and select General Preferences.
2. Choose the pick list in the upper-right corner, then select Shortcuts.
Creating a ShortCut
You can create a ShortCut for any words, letters, or numbers. All ShortCuts you create
appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are available in
any of your handheld applications and are backed up on your computer when you
perform a HotSync operation.
To create a ShortCut
1. Tap New .
2. On the ShortCut Name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the
ShortCut.
3. Select the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when you
write the ShortCut characters.
You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your ShortCut
text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
4. Tap OK.
To use a ShortCut:
l draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters.
The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut
mode.
Editing a ShortCut
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
To edit a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to edit.
2. Tap Edit.
3. Make the changes you want.
4. Tap OK.
Deleting a ShortCut
If you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.
To delete a ShortCut:
1. Tap the ShortCut you want to delete.
2. Tap Delete.
3. Tap Yes.
- 122 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.3 Application Launcher settings
To have better integration and look-and-feel for your QDA-700, Launcher II is used as the
default application launcher instead of the original Palm OS launcher.
Launcher II consists of 3 major components as follows:
l
l
l
Status Bar
Application List
Soft Button
For details about Status Bar and Soft Button, please refer to Chapter 1.4 First Run.
Whenever Launcher II is accessed, it displays the Home screen and shows the
application categories. You may tap into each category to access different applications.
To open a category, do one of the following
l Tap the category icon in Launcher II
l Tap the List soft button and select the desired category
To switch between categories
l Tap the name of the category to pop up a list of categories, select the desired
category
- 123 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To set the application launcher preference:
1. Tap Menu soft button.
2. Select App. Browser.
In the App. Browser, you will see the following options:
Dimension
Set the number of rows and columns to be shown in the
launcher.
Misc
- Chinese icon names first
Display the icon with Chinese names before those with
English names
- Popup menu delay time
Set the delay time before the menu pops up.
- Default launcher screen
Set the default application launcher between Launcher II
(i.e., App. Browser) and Palm (i.e., standard Palm
application launcher).
Tap OK when finished.
You can set the brightness of the QDA-700 screen in Application Launcher Settings:
To adjust the brightness:
1. Tap any category in the Launcher II.
2. Tap Menu and select Brightness in Tools menu.
3. Tap and drag the slider left and right to adjust the brightness.
4. Tap Done when finished.
- 124 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6. Multimedia
This section introduce QDA-700 Multimedia applications:
l
l
l
l
l
Audio Player
Voice Recorder
Camera
Photo Viewer
Photo Editor
- 125 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.1 Using Audio Player
Audio Player is a very handy tool to playback MP3 tracks on your SD/MMC expansion
card or expanded memory of your QDA-700 in either Audio Player or background (i.e.,
you can use other applications like Memo or Address Book, while the MP3 music is
playing). The title, artist, elapsed or remaining time of each MP3 track are displayed for
your convenience.
Open Audio Player
To start the Audio Player:
1. Tap the Multimedia category in Launcher II
2. Tap the MP3 icon
After the Audio Player has started, it pops up the screen as follows:
Stop Button
Forward / FF
Button
Backward / REW
Button
Play / Pause
Button
Operation of Audio Player
Storage of MP3 Music Files
You can store your MP3 music files in (1) the SD/MMC memory card which was inserted
into your QDA-700, or (2) the expanded memory of your QDA-700.
To select the source of MP3 files
Tap the 2 icons – QDA-700 expanded memory and SD/MMC card to select the source.
The MP3 files available in that source will be displayed accordingly.
- 126 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
MP3 Playback
To playback MP3 files
1. Insert the SD/MMC card on which the MP3 files are stored. If the MP3 files are
stored in the expanded memory, please skip to step 2 below.
2. Tap on the “Play/Pause” button to start the current track
3. To pause, press the “Play/Pause” button again
4. Press the “Stop” button to stop the playback
Note: MP3 files must be stored in the following default directory:
For SD/MMC memory card: /PALM/AUDIOPLY
For expanded memory: /PALM/AUDIO
To select the desired MP3 file
Do one of the following:
l Tap the file directly.
l Tap the “Forward/FF” or “Backward/REW” button to select the desired MP3 file by
pressing the button once to go to next or previous track respectively.
To start playback from the middle of an MP3 file
1. Tap the “Play/Pause” button to start playback.
2. Tap and hold the “Forward/FF” or “Backward/REW” button until you reach the
desired segment.
Volume Control
Increase Volume
Button
Mute Button
Decrease Volume
Button
Volume Bar
Control
- 127 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To control volume, do one of the following:
• Tap the “Increase Volume” or “Decrease Volume” button to increase or decrease
volume
• Tap and slide the “Volume Bar” control to increase or decrease volume
To toggle the sound output of the track, tap the “Mute” button.
Change of display mode
There are two display modes including List View and Title View . You can switch
between these modes by tapping the “Display mode” button.
List view
View Button
Display Mode
Button
Song Time
Button
In List View, a song list with track number in first column, title in second column and
information of the track in third column are shown. You can change the information of the
track in the third column to “Time”, “Artist” or “Album” by pressing the “View” button.
At the bottom of the list view, the track number and time of current track are shown. You
can choose to display elapsed, remaining time of the current track or remaining time of all
tracks by pressing the “Song Time” button. All remaining time is indicated by a negative
sign.
- 128 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Title view
Song Info
Button
Title, Artist and Album
Information Shown
Spectrum
In Title View, the track number and time of current track are shown. You can choose to
display elapsed, remaining time of the current track or remaining time of all tracks by
pressing the “Song Time” button. All remaining time is indicated by a negative sign.
In addition, the title, artist, album information and spectrum of the current track are shown.
If the title is missing at the tag of the track, the filename without file extension is shown
instead.
Track Management
A -> B Mode
Button
Play Mode
Button
- 129 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Play mode 1
Tab “Play Mode 1” button repeatedly to select “Continue”, “Shuffle” or “Program” mode.
To continue to play tracks in sequential order, select “Continue”
To play tracks in random sequence, select “Shuffle”
To play tracks selected only, select “Program”
Play mode 2
Tab the “Play Mode 2” button repeatedly to select “Repeat Off”, “Repeat Once” or
“Repeat All modes.
To repeat the current track, select “Repeat Once”
To repeat all the tracks on the song list, select Repeat All
To play tracks on the song list once no repeat, select “Repeat Off”
A->B mode
Use the “A->B Mode”
to be played repeatedly.
button to select a particular segment of the current track
1. While playing the track, press the “A->B Mode”
point of the segment you want repeated.
2. The “A->B Mode” button will change from
button to set the starting
to
3. At the end point of the segment, press the “A ->B Mode”
.
button.
to
.
4. The “A->B Mode” button will change from
5. After you have completed the above four steps, the selected segment will be
played repeatedly.
You can cancel this operation by pressing the “A->B Mode” button again. The button
will revert back to its initial state
.
- 130 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Menu operation
Options menu
Preferences
About Audio Player
Enable or disable system sound and background play by
toggle the checkbox of “Operation Beep” and “Background
Play” respectively.
Display the version of the application
- 131 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tools Menu
Card Info
Display the card volume, total memory and used memory.
You can tap the Card Volume pick list in Card Info to select
between expanded memory and SD/MMC card (if
inserted).
Album Info
Display album information including format, total time and
number of tracks. You can tap the Card Volume pick list in
Album Info to select between expanded memory and
SD/MMC card (if inserted).
Song Info
Display the title, artist, album, time, track number, genre
and full path of the song currently selected.
Sound Effect
Select bass level. Options include high, medium, low and
off.
Edit List
Edit the play list by adding or deleting songs from play list.
Only selected song names will be displayed in List View.
- 132 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.2 Using Voice Recorder
Voice Recorder is a very handy tool to record and playback voice memo on your
SD/MMC expansion card or expanded memory of your QDA-700
Open Voice Recorder
To start the Voice Recorder:
3. Tap the Multimedia category in Launcher II
4. Tap the Voice Recorder icon
After the Voice Recorder has started, it pops up the screen as follows:
Voice Memo can be stored in either one of the following:
l Internal memory (RAM)
l Expanded memory
l SD/MMC memory card
To select the storage location of voice memo:
l Tap the red arrow icon (put the icon here) to select between RAM, expanded
memory and SD/MMC memory card (from left to right).
To record a voice memo
1. Select the appropriate storage location
2. Tap Rec to start the recording.
3. Point the microphone of your QDA-700 to the sound source.
4. Tap the Stop icon to stop the recording.
To playback a voice memo
1. Select the voice memo from the voice memo list.
2. Tap the Play/Pause button to start the current track
3. To pause, press the Play/Pause button again
4. Press the Stop button to stop the playback
- 133 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To select the desired voice memo
Do one of the following:
l Tap the file directly.
l Tap the Forward/FF or Backward/REW button to select the desired voice memo by
pressing the button once to go to next or previous track respectively.
To start playback from the middle of a voice memo
1. Tap the Play/Pause button to start playback.
2. Tap and hold the Forward/FF or Backward/REW button until you reach the
desired segment.
To delete a voice memo
1. Select the voice memo from the voice memo list.
2. Tap the trash icon on the top of the screen.
3. Tap OK to confirm or tap Cancel to abort.
To copy a voice memo
1. Select the voice memo from the voice memo list.
2. Tap the Copy voice memo icon on the top of the screen.
3. Select the new storage location
4. Tap OK to confirm or tap Cancel to abort.
Volume Control
Increase Volume
Button
Mute Button
Decrease Volume
Button
Volume Bar
Control
To control volume, do one of the following:
• Tap the Increase Volume or Decrease Volume button to increase or decrease
the volume
• Tap and slide the Volume Bar control to increase or decrease the volume
To toggle the sound output of the track, tap the Mute button.
- 134 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
List view
View Button
Memo Time
Button
In List View , a voice memo list with track number is in the first column, title in second
column and information of the track in third column are shown. You can change the track
information in the third column to Time, Type or Size by pressing the View button.
At the bottom of the list view, the track number and time of current track are shown. You
can choose to display elapsed, remaining time of the current track or remaining time of all
tracks by pressing the “Memo Time” button. All remaining time is indicated by a negative
sign.
- 135 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Menu operation
Options menu
Preferences
Enable or disable the system sound by toggle the checkbox of
Operation Beep, and selecting storage location between
DOC (i.e., expanded memory) and Ext. Card (i.e., SD/MMC
expansion card)
About Voice Memo
Display the version information of the application
- 136 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tools Menu
Card Info
Display the card volume, total memory and used memory.
You can tap the Card Volume pick list in Card Info to select
between expanded memory and SD/MMC card (if inserted).
Album Info
Display album information including format, total time and
number of tracks. You can tap the Card Volume pick list in
Album Info to select between expanded memory and SD/MMC
card (if inserted).
Voice Memo Info
Display the filename, time, date, file size and file format of the
voice memo currently selected.
Play Mode
Selection of playback mode. You can choose among Repeat
Off, Repeat One and Repeat All.
Delete
Delete the voice memo currently selected. Tap OK to confirm or
tap Cancel to abort.
Rename
Rename the currently selected voice memo. Enter a new
filename and then tap OK to confirm or tap Cancel to abort.
Copy
Copy the selected voice memo from the current storage
location to another.
- 137 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.3 Using Camera
Your QDA-700 is equipped with a digital camera that allows you take pictures, send them
via email or MMS and use them as wallpaper, caller ID picture, etc.
The pictures can be copied to your desktop computer by performing a Hotsync operation
or via a card reader. The maximum resolution of the pictures is approx. 1.3M pixels
(1280x960 pixels).
To take a picture
1. Tap the Multimedia category in Launcher II and select the Camera icon, or press
the Camera button at the left side of your QDA-700.
2.
3.
4.
Position your QDA-700 at the subject you want to take photo. Make sure you can
see the object on the screen clearly. The camera is situated at the back of your
QDA-700.
Check the capture resolution shown below the preview screen.
Press the Camera button at the left side or the red shutter button on the screen to
capture the picture. The picture will be captured and saved in your QDA-700
automatically. Thumbnails of the pictures are immediately shown at the bottom of
the screen. Only the pictures captured in this camera session are shown as
thumbnail. To view other old pictures, please use the PHOTO application.
icon
Full Screen Mode: You can switch to full screen mode by tapping the
on the screen. In full screen mode, you must use the Camera button to capture the
picture. To quit full screen mode, tap the screen and choose Quit.
Advise: Picture quality will be affected by lighting conditions when you take the
picture. Try to take the picture in sunshine or with adequate lighting when indoors.
- 138 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
View a picture immediately
1. Tap on the desired thumbnail on the bottom part of the screen.
2. Tap the ß icon at the top-right corner to return to Camera mode.
You can switch to PHOTO Photo Viewer to view the picture clearly by tapping the
icon.
Only the pictures captured in this camera session are shown as thumbnail. To view other
old pictures, please use the PHOTO application.
Choose a suitable light type for your subject (White Balance)
In order to have the correct exposure and color setting for your pictures, you can select
the appropriate light type for your subject before you capture the picture.
To select a suitable light type, tap one of the below icons on the screen
•
Auto
•
Tungsten
•
Sunlight
•
Night
Using Digital Zoom
The camera function of your QDA-700 is equipped with digital zoom (1X, 2X and 4X).
When you are positioning the camera at the subject, you can zoom in the image and vice
versa.
To use digital zoom
l In camera screen, tap + and – icons to adjust the zoom setting.
You can see the current digital zoom setting at the left of + icon.
Digital zoom can be used in both normal and full screen modes. Nevertheless, the
adjustment of digital zoom is only available in normal screen mode.
- 139 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Customizing your Camera settings
To change camera settings:
1.
2.
Tap
to pop up the Preference screen
Tap Save to pick list to select the storage destination of the captured pictures.
Pictures can only be saved in expanded memory or on the SD/MMC memory card
3.
Tap Capture Res
to select the desired picture resolution from QVGA
(320x240 pixels), VGA (640x480 pixels) or SXGA (1280x960 pixels) or 5 Mega
pixels (2560 x 1920)
Select the checkbox next to Reset file number if you want to restart the picture
number from 1 every time you start the Camera application.
Select the checkbox next to Continuous capture if you want to capture four
consecutive pictures at one time. This function is only applicable if the capture
resolution is set to QVGA or VGA.
Tap Purge album cache if you want to delete the album cache from the memory.
Tap OK to confirm or Cancel to abort. Album cache is used to speed up the preview
but it will take up memory space too.
Tap OK when finished or Cancel to abort.
4.
5.
6.
7.
- 140 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.4 Using Video Recorder & Player
In addition to taking still pictures, you can also record every unforgettable moment in
video format with the QDA-700’s built-in camera. Your QDA-700 allows you to save the
video in both flash memory and SD/MMC expansion card.
Video in QDA-700 is saved in ASF format using the latest MPEG-4 video compression
technology which provides you quality video at comparable small file size. Small file
size means you can store more video with your QDA-700 and send to your contacts
easily. (Note: ASF video files can only be playback in Windows platform.)
Recording a Video
Recording a video is as easy as taking a still picture in your QDA-700. The total
recording time depends on the following factors:
- available storage space in SD/MMC expansion card and/or flash memory
- content of your video such as motion and colour
To record a video, do the following:
1. Tap Multimedia category in the Launcher II
Open
Volume
Camcoder
Stop
Play
2. Select the Video icon.
Info
The following Playback screen displays
- 141 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3. Tap the Camcorder icon to activate the Recording screen. The
maximum available video recording time is shown at the rightmost of the
timeline in the screen.
Remaining
Record Time
Record
Stop
Tool
Return to
PLAYBACK Screen
4. Position your QDA-700 at the subject you want to take photo. Make sure
you can see the object on the screen clearly. The camera is situated at the
back of your QDA-700.
5. Tap Record icon to start capturing the video. You can pause the video
capture by tapping the Pause icon and resume video capture by tapping the
Record icon again.
6. To stop capturing, tap the Stop icon once. The video is saved immediately
after you have tapped the Stop icon.
- 142 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Adjust Video Settings
1. Tap Multimedia category in the Launcher II and select the Video
icon.
2. Switch to Recording screen by tapping the Camcorder icon.
3.
Tap the Tool icon and the Recorder Settings screen displays
Path
Location where the video are saved. Tap DIR to select between
flash memory and SD/MMC expansion card. You may select
individual folder in either storage media.
File Format
Available file formats of captured video: ASF, MP4, 3GP.
All of them can be playback in both QDA-700 and computer (with
Microsoft Window Media Player or Apple QuickTime Player installed)
Video Codec
Video compression & decompression method.
default option in your QDA-700.
Resolution
Screen size of the captured video.
(pixels) with QDA-700.
Bitrate
Sampling rate of video. Available options include 64kbps, 96kbps
(default), 128kbps, 192kbps, 256kbps, 384kbps, 512kbps, 768kbps
and 1024kbps. Higher bit rate (i.e., 1024kbps) means better video &
sound quality but it means larger file size as well, and vice versa.
FPS
FPS stands for Frame Per Second. Available options include
10FPS and 15FPS. Higher FPS (i.e., 15FPS) means smooth
motion in the video (which means larger file size too) while 10FPS
gives you smaller file size with less smooth motion.
MPEG4 is the
You can take video of 176 x 144
Note: Actual FPS in captured video may vary with your selection. It is normal with
MPEG-4 video compression technology as your QDA-700 will select the optimal
frame rate according to the video motion.
Enable Audio
By default, audio will be recorded along with the video capture.
Tap Done when you have adjusted the settings.
- 143 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Viewing a Video
Viewing video is not limited to your computer, you can view the video in your QDA-700
instantly!
To view a video:
1. Tap Multimedia category in the Launcher II and select the Video icon.
The Playback screen displays.
2. Tap Open icon to open the file browser. You can tap the location pick list
at the top of the screen to toggle between SD/MMC expansion card and
flash memory.
3. Navigate between folders in the selected storage media and select the
desired video file. Viewable video files are denoted by the respective file
size at the right of the file name.
4. Tap Done to confirm the file selection and the video playbacks immediately.
You can tap the Pause icon to pause the video playback or tap the Stop
icon to stop the playback at any instances. Paused playback can be
continued at the paused frame by tapping the Playback icon once, while
stopped playback will be playback from the beginning if the Playback icon
is tapped.
Note: You can adjust the volume level in playback mode by tapping the Volume icon and
slide the volume control to left or right.
Checking Video Details
You can check the file details whenever a video file is selected
To check the video details:
1. Tap Multimedia category in the Launcher II and select the Video icon. The
Playback screen displays.
2. Tap Open icon to open the file browser. You can tap the location pick list
at the top of the screen to toggle between SD/MMC expansion card and
flash memory.
3. Navigate between folders in the selected storage media and select the
desired video file. Viewable video files are denoted by the respective file
size at the right of the file name.
4. Tap Done to confirm the file selection and the video playbacks immediately.
5. Tap the Info icon to view the video details.
6. Tap OK when finished.
View ing Video in Computer
In addition to viewing your video in QDA-700, you can also view your video (saved in the
SD/MMC card) in the Windows-based computer with Microsoft Window Media Player &
QuickTime Player by Apple Computer. Free version of QuickTime Player can be
downloaded from www.quicktime.com
- 144 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To view video in computer:
1. Make sure your video file is saved in your QDA-700’s SD/MMC expansion
card and no data transfer with the SD/MMC expansion card is in progress.
(Note: You can move the video file saved in flash memory to SD/MMC
expansion card using the built-in File Mover application. For details,
please refer to Chapter 10.4 - File Mover).
2. Eject the SD/MMC expansion card from the card slot and insert into an
appropriate card recorder which already connected to your computer.
3. Launch Window Media Player or QuickTime application in your computer
and open your video file.
Delete a Video
You can delete the captured video whenever it is required. It can be done using the
QDA-700’s built-in File Mover application. For details, please refer to Chapter 10.4 - File
Mover.
- 145 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.5 Using Photo Viewer
PHOTO Photo Viewer allows you to view and organize JPEG images in your QDA-700 or
in an expansion card. The application allows you to do the following operations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Locate images quickly with the Large, Small Thumbnail and List View
Slide show function
Organize images into different albums
View detailed information of each photo
Have description of an image with notes
Image editing: zoom, rotate, pan
Copy, move and delete images from handheld or card
Exchange images with other devices through infrared
To open PHOTO
To start the PHOTO Photo Viewer:
1. Tap the Multimedia category in Launcher II
2. Select Photos icon
After the PHOTO has started, it pops up the screen as follows:
Info icon
Media icon
Select / Edit Album
icon
Select Directory
icon
Menu icon
Slide show
icon
Large thumbnail
view icon
List view
icon
Small thumbnail
view icon
- 146 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Info
Toggle to view the following information:
- Number of image at current directory and
media
- Path of current directory
- Page number in the current directory
Media
Toggle to select the view by location (handheld, Card or Both)
Select/Edit
Select or edit album
Select Directory
Select directory on expansion card or expanded memory
Large thumbnail view Select to view the images in large thumbnail view
Small thumbnail view Select to view the images in small thumbnail view
List View
Select to view the images in list view
Slide Show
Tap the “Slide Show” icon to start a slideshow
Menu
Tap on the “Menu” icon to display the Options and Preferences
Menu
Select view location
You can view the images on handheld, expansion card or on both media simultaneously.
To toggle the view location, tap on the “Media” icon.
1.
2.
3.
- Displays images stored in handheld’s internal memory
- Displays images stored in the memory card of your QDA-700. When the
application starts at first time, it will search for the images stored in the directory
\DCIM. If this directory does not exit, a default directory \PALM\Images will be
created.
- Displays images on both media simultaneously
Select Album
This Select Album feature is disabled by default. You can enable this feature in Advanced
Preferences. After you have enabled this feature, you can view the images in different
albums.
To enable the Album feature setting, do one of the following:
l When prompted for “Please enable Album feature in Advanced Preferences setting”,
Tap Adv Pref Setting. Tap Album features to enable and tab OK
l Tap menu and choose Advanced in Preference menu. Tap Album features to
enable and tab OK.
- 147 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To select album:
1. Tap on “Select/Edit Album”
2. Select the album name
icon
By default, all images are in “Unfiled” album. To view the images in all albums, select “All”
album.
Edit Album
You can create, rename or delete an album located in your QDA-700 (i.e., RAM) and
SD/MMC memory card (i.e., Card) by selecting “Edit Albums …”. Each directory has its
own album, so we can categorize the images in the directory into different albums.
Create a new album
To create a new album:
1. Tap New
2. Select a location for the album
3. Enter a title for the album
4. Tap “OK” twice.
Rename or delete an album
You can rename or delete any of the albums that you have created. However you cannot
rename or delete the Unfiled album.
To rename an album:
1. Select the album you want to rename
2. Tap Rename
3. Enter the new name
4. Tap “OK” twice
To delete an album:
1. Select the album you want to delete
2. Tap Delete
If you delete an album, all images stored under that album will become unfilled images.
- 148 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Select directory on card
You can view the images in different directories. Tap the “Select Directory” icon to start
the following dialog in order to browse and select the directory.
Views
You can view your images stored in your QDA-700 or expansion card in a number of
different ways. At the bottom the PHOTO window, there are 3 view buttons available: list
view, small thumbnail view and large thumbnail view.
List view
By viewing the images in list view, the filename, date, size and dimension of the image
, you can view the
will be shown. In addition, by clicking on the information icon
detailed information of the image and add notes to the image.
- 149 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
List View
Toggle to view the
size and
dimension of the
image if “Show
dimensions” option
is checked at the
Advanced
Preference.
Otherwise only
size of the image
will be shown.
Tap on the
filename to
view the image
in fit screen
mode
Tap on the icon to view
the details of the image
Individual View
- 150 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To view images in list view
1. Tap on the “List view” icon
2. Tap on the “Media” icon to select the view location
3. Tap on the “Select directory” icon to select the directory you want to view if the
media chosen is expansion card
4. Tap on the “Select/Edit Album” icon at the upper-right corner to select the album
you want to view in the directory.
5. To view an individual image, tap on the filename directly
6. To return to list view from individual view, tap and hold anywhere on the screen,
then tap “Home”.
Small Thumbnail View
By viewing the images in small thumbnail view, only thumbnail will be shown.
To view images in small thumbnail view
1. Tap on the “Small thumbnail view” icon
2. Tap on the “Media” icon to select the view location
3. Tap on the “Select directory” icon to select the directory you want to view if the
media chosen is expansion card
4. Tap on the “Select/Edit Album” icon at the upper-right corner to select the album
you want to view in the directory.
5. To view an individual image, tap on the image directly
6. To return to small thumbnail view from individual view, tap and hold anywhere on
the screen, then tap “Home”.
- 151 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Large Thumbnail View
By viewing the images in large thumbnail view, large thumbnail and filename will be
shown.
Tap on the filename to
view the details of the
image
To view images in large thumbnail view
1. Tap on the “Large thumbnail view” icon
2. Tap on the “Media” icon to select the view location
3. Tap on the “Select directory” icon to select the directory you want to view if the
media chosen is expansion card
4. Tap on the “Select/Edit Album” icon at the upper-right corner to select the album
you want to view in the directory.
5. To view an individual image, tap on the image directly
6. To return to large thumbnail view from individual view, tap and hold anywhere on
the screen, then tap “Home”.
If you want to view the detailed information of the image, tap on the filename under the
thumbnail. The information of the image will be shown as follows:
- 152 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
You can perform the following operations in the Image Details dialog:
1. Change the image location from location pick up list
2. Add or edit note
3. Beam the image
4. Delete the image
In list view, you also can view the image details by tap on the
icon.
Slide Show
A slide show is a sequential presentation of all images in the current album.
To view a slide show
1. Tap the “Select Directory” icon to select the directory you want to view
2. Tap the “Select/Edit Album” icon in the upper-right corner to select the album you
want to view in the directory
to start the slideshow. All of the images currently
3. Tap the slideshow icon
in view will be displayed in the slideshow and the slideshow will start from the
currently selected images or the beginning if no image is selected. The duration of
each image shown is determined by the setting of Slide Duration in General
Preferences. Default slide duration is two seconds.
4. Stop the slideshow by tapping the screen.
Individual View
You can tap on the filename in list view or image in thumbnail view to enter the individual
view as follows. If the bar does not appear at the bottom of the screen, tap and hold the
displayed image to pop up the menu. Choose Show Bar.
- 153 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tap on the “Home”
button to return to
the previous view
Tap to hide the panel
Tap on the “1:1” button
to view the image in its
original size
Tap on the
“Previous” button to
move back through
the series of images
Tap on the “Next”
button to move
forward through
the series of
images
Toggle to select fill
screen
or fit
screen
mode
Tap on the “Zoom”
button to zoom in
or out the image
Tap on the “Rotate
Clockwise” button
to rotate the image
90 degrees in
clockwise direction
Tap on the “Rotate
Anticlockwise”
button to rotate the
image 90 degrees
in anticlockwise
direction
The image is displayed at 100% of its size. You can rotate, zoom and pan the image.
- 154 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Zoom View
In the zoom view, you can use the slide or -, + button to adjust the size of the image and
pan the image by dragging the stylus on the image.
Using PHOTO Menu
You can tap the menu icon or the title area at the top of the screen to open the menu bar.
Two menus are available: Options, Preferences.
Options Menu
The Options menu is selected and contains the commands, Change Album, Beam, Copy,
Move, Delete, About PHOTO
- 155 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Change Album
By default, all images are in “Unfiled” album. You can change the images to other album
by selecting “Change Album” on the menu.
To change album
1. Tap the menu icon
2. Select “Options” and then “Change Album” on the menu
3. Tap to select the images and tap “OK”
4. Select the album and tap “OK”
Beam
You can send a selected image to another device by select “Beam” on the menu.
To beam images
1. Tap the menu icon
2. Select “Options” and then “Beam” on the menu
3. Tap to select one image and tap “OK”
- 156 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4. Point the IR port on your QDA-700 at the IR port on the receiving device.
Copy
The copy command enables you to make a copy of an image on your handheld or an
expansion card. If the image is on your handheld, it can be copied to an expansion card.
If the image is on an expansion card, it can be copied to handheld or other directory on
card.
To copy images
1. Tap the menu icon
2. Select “Options” and then “Copy” on the menu
3. Tap to select images you want to copy and tap “OK”
4. Select to copy to handheld or to card
5. If you select to copy to card, tap “Browse” to select the directory you want to copy
to and tap “OK”.
Move
The move command can enables you to move images on your handheld or an expansion
card. If the image is on your handheld, it can be moved to an expansion card. If the image
is on an expansion card, it can be moved to handheld or other directory on card.
- 157 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To move images
1. Tap the menu icon
2. Select “Options” and then “Move” on the menu
3. Tap to select images you want to move and tap “OK”
4. Select to move to handheld or to card
5. If you select to move to card, tap “Browse” to select the directory you want to
move to and tap “OK”.
Delete
To delete images
1. Tap the menu icon
2. Select “Options” and then “Delete” on the menu
3. Tap to select images you want to delete and tap “OK”
About
It shows the version and vendor information of the PHOTO application.
- 158 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Preferences Menu
The Preferences menu is selected and contains the commands General, Advanced,
Purge thumbnail cache, Purge thumbnail cache, Clean up card and Reset.
General
Tapping the General field brings up the following screen:
Thumbnail
Size:
Determines the size of the thumbnail at large and small thumbnail view.
Display:
Determines the display mode of the thumbnail. Choose “Fit screen” to fit
the full image to the thumbnail. Choose “Fill screen” to crop the image to
best fit to the thumbnail.
Slide Show
Slide duration: Tap the pull-down menu to select the length of time you would like each
image to display during a Slideshow.
- 159 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
View Image
Init display:
Determines the display mode of the images at
individual view. Choose “Fit screen to fit the full image
to the screen. Choose “Fill screen” to crop the image
to best fit to the screen. Choose “Original resolution” to
display the image at its original size.
Show panel initially:
Determines whether to show the image editing panel
at the bottom of the screen when individual view has
been entered.
Long tap – show popup list:
Check this box to add delay time to show up the
popup list when tap on screen.
Advanced
Tapping the Advanced field brings up the following screen:
Max. image resolution:
Determines the maximum resolution of image which
allowed to be displayed by this application.
Show dimensions:
Determines whether to show the dimension of the image at
the list view
Album feature:
Determines whether to enable the album feature
Show mem usage :
Determines whether to enable the option of showing
memory usage featured in pop-up menu of individual view.
Purge thumbnail cache
After you browse the images at thumbnail view, the thumbnails will be cached at a
temporary file. You can purge this temporary file by using “Purge thumbnail cache”
function.
- 160 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Purge album cache
The information of album will be cached at a temporary file. You can purge this temporary
file by using “Purge album cache” function.
Clean up card
All album cache, thumbnail cache and temporarily files created by this application at the
external card, except for the current accessing directory, will be purged.
Reset
The application will return to its initial status. All preferences will be reset to their default
value.
- 161 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
6.6 Using Photo Editor
Photo Editor is a powerful screen capture and image editing utility. You can use Photo
Editor to do the following:
• Take screenshots from any screen and save images in BMP or JPG formats
• Edit images in JPG formats in freehand drawing, drawing shapes or line, input text
and save images in BMP or JPG formats on RAM or SD/MMC Memory Card.
• Unlimited number of undo and redo operations
Using Photo Editor
To start the Photo Editor:
- Tap Multimedia category in Launcher II and select Photo Editor icon
After the Photo Editor is started, it pops up the screen as follow:
Save
Undo Redo
New Image
Color Palette
Enable / Disable
Screen Capture
Drawing Area
Drawing Tools
Create or edit an image
You can create or edit an image in JPG format using Photo Editor.
To create a new image
1. Tap New Image icon
2. Enter the dimension for the new image. The maximum dimension is equal to the
screen resolution of your QDA-700 (i.e., 320 pixels (W) x 480 pixels (H))
3. Tap “OK”
- 162 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tap to create
an image
To edit an image
1. Tap New Image icon
2. Tap on the square with text “Select background image”
3. Select the image you want to edit and tap “OK”
4. Selected image and its dimension are shown and tap “OK”. If the original size of
the image is larger than the resolution of the handheld, you should adjust the size
before proceeding to editing
Save image
You can save the edited image to your handheld (i.e., RAM) or to an expansion card in
the format of BMP or JPG.
Tap to save
an image
- 163 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Screen capture
Enable screen capture
You can define your own hotkey to start a screen capture of the handheld. You can
accomplish this by the following steps:
1. Tapping on the capture icon
2. Checking the Enable box
Tap enable
/ disable
3.
4.
5.
Select the hotkey to start screen capture
Set the delay value, which is the delay time between pressing the hotkey and
starting capture. Default value is zero.
Select the format and location of the image captured
After completing the above setting, you can switch to any applications and capture the
screen image by pressing the assigned hotkey.
The capture will be saved in the default directory /Palm/PiDraw if you select to save the
capture to card. The name of the captured image will start by “SC” and together wi th a
sequential number generated by QDA-700.
Disable screen capture
You can disable screen capture feature by de-selecting the Enable box. The assigned
hotkey will return to its normal status.
- 164 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Drawing Tools
Toolbar button layout (from left to right)
Pencil
Draws free lines on the image.
Paint Brush
Draws free lines of variable widths based on pen pressure.
Airbrush
Creates an airbrush effect.
Eraser
Erases parts of the image to the background color.
Line
Draws straight lines.
Rectangle
Draws hollow/filled rectangles.
Ellipse
Draws hollow/filled ellipse shapes.
Text
Draws text description on the image.
Pen Width
Select the default pen width.
Color Picker
Picks colors from any part of the screen and changes the foreground
color.
Pan
Pans the image by clicking and dragging in the window
- 165 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7. Connection
In addition to general organizer functions and mobile phone features, you can use your
QDA-700 for other wireless activities:
l
l
l
Web browsing
WAP browsing (Please check the manual of JATAAYU WAP BROWSER)
Instant messaging (Please visit www.jabber.org/user/userguide for further
information)
To use these wireless activities, data service must be subscribed. Please check with your
mobile phone service provider for details.
Besides wireless connection, your QDA-700 can be connected to your computer via
HotSync, Infra-red transmission (i.e., Beam), etc.
- 166 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.1 Browsing Internet
Your QDA-700 has a built-in web browser called Web Browser which allows you to view
Internet web pages. Please note you must setup the internet connection before you can
browse the web.
To open Web Browser
1. Tap Connection icon in Launcher II.
2. Tap Web icon.
When Web Browser is launched from the launcher, it will automatically go to the Home
Page or the last page visited, based on a preference set in the General Preferences
panel. If the Home Page is on the Internet, the access will follow the Caching rules. If the
page is cached and refreshed, it will show without any over the air activity. If the page is
either not cached or not fresh, it will perform a wireless transaction to get a fresh page.
To open a web page:
1. Tab menu and select Open URL in Page menu, or tap the Globe icon
at the top
of the screen.
2. Enter the website address in the URL field. If a URL has been previously entered,
the Autofill feature will automatically fill it in after you enter a few characters.
3. You may tap the pre-defined shortcuts to simplify the typing.
4. Tap Go when finished.
When the page is being downlo aded, the title bar displays information about the
download process. Tap the X stop button on the top-right of the screen to stop the
progress and cancel the downloading of the page.
Following a Link
Links in many web pages take you to another web page or other part of the same page.
To follow a link:
- Tap the link
Return to your home page
No matter where you navigate on the Internet, you can return to your home page easily
and quickly.
- Tap the Home icon
at the top of the screen.
You can set the home page to your desired website in the Preference menu.
Return to a web page you recently visited
Go back to the last web page
- Tap the Back icon
at the top of the screen.
Go forward through the cached page
- Tap the Forward icon
at the top of the screen.
Go to a page with History List
- 167 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
In addition to the back and forward icons, you can open the History list to go to a page
you recently visited. The recently visited web pages include cached pages or stored
URLs. Cached pages are stored in cache memory and have a icon next to the name in
the list. When you select a cached page, you will be asked to view the stored page or
refresh the page.
To open the web page in History:
1. Tap menu
2. Select History in Page menu
3.
4.
Tap the cached webpage (with a
icon) you want to visit and tap Go to proceed.
(Tap Done will exit from History and return to your previous location)
Select Yes if you want to view the cached version, or select No if you want to
retrieve the most updated version.
To clear the History
1. Tap menu
2. Select History in Page menu
3. Tap Clear to delete the current history.
Saving Web Page
You may choose to save any web page displayed. A saved web page will never be
deleted by Web. You have to manage his/her saved pages manually.
To save a page
1. Tap menu and choose Save Page in Page menu. A Save Page dialogs appears.
2. You can edit the title of web page that automatically input by the application.
3. Tap Category pick list to choose a category to store the page. Unfiled is the default
category.
4. If the page cannot be saved due to memory constrain, an alert will be displayed and
the page will not be saved. To solve the issue, please delete some of your web
content files.
5.
Tap Save when finished.
To view or edit a saved page
1. Tap the Open Content icon in the tool bar.
Open Content Icon
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tap Saved Pages
Tap the pick list below Saved Pages to select the category
Tap to select the desired saved page
Tap Go when finished and the saved page will be opened.
Tap Edit to bring another dialog for editing the properties of the saved page.
Bookmark your favourite pages
- 168 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Bookmarks allow you to save the URL of any web page. You can bookmark any web
page visited. You can add, edit, delete, or categorize bookmarks. In addition, other
applications can launch Web Browser to display bookmarks.
To add a bookmark
1. Go to the web page that you want to bookmark
2. Tap the heart icon on the top of the screen
3. Select Add
You may edit the bookmark name, URL and category by tapping Edit.
4. Tap Save
View a bookmarked page
1. Tap the Open Content icon in the tool bar.
Open Content Icon
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tap Bookmarks
Tap the pick list below Bookmarks to select the category
Tap to select the desired bookmark
Tap Go when finished and the web page will be opened.
Tap Edit to bring another dialog for editing the properties of the web page.
Changing the size of text
- Tap menu and select either Smaller Text or Bigger Text in Options menu
Setting Web Preferences
Web Preferences consists of 3 pages – General, Connecting and Privacy.
General
Home Page
Tap to change the home page.
Start with
To make the last page your homepage, tap the last page
option in this pick list.
Load images
Select this if you want to download images. Note that images
take longer time to download.
Enable JavaScript
Select this if you want to enable JavaScript.
Max. History Size
To store more pages, enter a larger number. To store fewer
pages, enter a smaller number
History Used
The web pages you open create a History list and are stored,
so that you can retrieve them more quickly.
- 169 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Connecting
Ask before connecting
Select this if you want QDA-700 to ask permission
before connecting to the Internet
Offer old content if available
Let you view the most recently downloaded version of
web content without connecting to the Internet.
Use Proxy
If your network requires an HTTP proxy server to
reach external websites, enable this checkbox and
enter its address here.
Privacy
Autofill web text fields
Automatically fills in any text you have previously entered
in an edit field.
Enable Cookies
Select this if you want you QDA-700 to accept cookies
from a website. Some web sites store information in a
small text file, called a cookie. Cookies usually contain
information about you and your preferences for that web
site. A site can use this information to customize the
pages you see the next time you visit.
- 170 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.2 Using HotSync
HotSync technology lets you synchronize - exchange and update - data between one or
more Palm OS device(s) like QDA-700 and Palm Desktop software or another PIM such
as Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you must connect your QDA-700 and Palm
Desktop software either directly, by connecting your QDA-700 and your computer using
the HotSync cable or using infrared communications, or indirectly, with the built-in GSM
radio.
The HotSync process automatically synchronizes data between your QDA-700 and Palm
Desktop software. Changes you make on your QDA-700 or Palm Desktop software
appear in both places after a HotSync operation. HotSync technology synchronizes only
the needed portions of files, thus reducing synchronization time.
Performing a HotSync Operation for the First Time
The first time you synchronize your data, you must enter user information on both the
QDA-700 and Palm Desktop software. After you enter this information and synchronize,
the HotSync Manager recognizes your QDA-700 and doesn’t ask for this information
again.
If you are a System Administrator preparing several QDA-700s for a group of users, you
may want to create a user profile. See “Create a user profile” later in this chapter before
performing the following steps.
Performing the First Local HotSync Operation
You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct connection, rather than
using a modem.
The following steps assume that you have already installed the Palm Desktop software. If
you have not installed this software, look for instructions “Using Palm Desktop” in
Chapter 7.5.
- 171 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To perform a local HotSync operation
1. Plug the Hotsync cable to your QDA-700.
2. Enable the HotSync software.
Windows. On Windows, the HotSync Manager must be running for the HotSync
operation to proceed. If it is running, the HotSync icon appears in the Windows
system tray. If the HotSync Manager is not running, select the Start button on the
Windows desktop and choose Programs. Navigate to the Palm Desktop software
program group and choose HotSync Manager. Alternatively, you can start the Palm
Desktop software which automatically opens the HotSync Manager.
3. Tap the HotSync icon in the Connection category of Launcher II.
4. Select the user name you entered when you installed Palm Desktop software. The
HotSync Progress dialog appears and synchronization begins.
Every QDA-700 must have a unique name. Never try to synchronize more than one
QDA-700 to the same user name, or data loss may be resulted.
5. Wait for a message on your QDA-700 indicating that the process is complete.
When the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your QDA-700 from the
cradle.
Creating a user profile
You can create a user profile to load data into a QDA-700 without associating that data
with a user name. This feature lets System Administrators configure several QDA-700s
with specific information (such as a company phone list) before distributing them to their
actual users. On Windows, you use the File Link feature of the Palm Desktop software to
import information from external files. For more information see “Using file link” later in
this chapter. The User Profile feature is designed only for the first-time HotSync operation,
before you assign a User ID to a particular QDA-700.
To create a user profile
1. Open Palm Desktop software.
2. Choose Users from the Tools menu.
3. Select Profiles.
4. Tap New, enter an unique name for the profile and select OK.
5. Tap OK to return to Palm Desktop software.
6. Select the profile from the User list and create the data for the profile (for example,
company phone list and so on).
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation
1. Place the new QDA-700 in the cradle.
2. Press the HotSync button on the cradle.
3. Select Profiles.
4. Select the profile that you want to load on the QDA-700 and tap OK.
5. Choose Yes to transfer all the profile data to the QDA-700.
- 172 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Selecting HotSync Setup Options
You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, you can adjust
the local and modem HotSync settings as well.
To set the HotSync options
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. Choose Setup.
3. Click the General tab and select one of the following options:
Always Available
Available Only When
Palm Desktop software
Is Running
Manual
adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and
constantly monitors the communication port for
synchronization requests from your QDA-700. With
this option, the HotSync Manager synchronizes data
even when Palm Desktop software is not running.
starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests
automatically when you open Palm Desktop
software.
monitors requests only when you select HotSync
Manager from the Start menu
If you’re not sure which option to use, keep the default setting, Always Available.
As your QDA-700 use the USB cable, you do not need to use the settings on the Local
tab for a direct HotSync operation.
Customizing HotSync Application Settings
For each application, you can define a set of options that determines how records are
handled during synchronization. These options are called a “conduit.” By default, a
HotSync operation synchronizes all files between the QDA-700 and Palm Desktop
software.
In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only reason you
might want to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your QDA-700 or Palm
Desktop software, or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of file because you don’t use
it.
In addition to the conduits for Date Book, Contacts, To Do List and Memo Pad, Palm
Desktop software includes System and Install conduits. The System conduit backs up the
system information stored on your QDA-700, including Graffiti® 2 ShortCuts. The Install
conduit installs applications on your QDA-700.
- 173 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To customize HotSync application settings
1. Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray (bottom right corner of the
taskbar).
Tips: You can also tap the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu
bar.
2. Choose Custom from the HotSync Manager menu.
3. Select the appropriate user name from the list.
4. Select an application in the Conduit list and tap Change.
5. Select the direction in which you want to write data, or select Do Nothing to skip data
transfer for an application.
6. Choose how long the setting will remain in effect:
- To have the setting affect only the next HotSync operation, deselect Set As
Default. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings.
- To use a new setting as the default, select the Set As Default option. Thereafter,
whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you tap the Default
button in the Custom dialog.
7. Tap OK.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9. Click Done to activate your settings.
- 174 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
IR HotSync Operations
Your QDA-700 is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that supports the IrCOMM
implementation of the standards for infrared communication established by the Infrared
Data Association (IrDA). This means that you can beam data to any other device that
supports the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards. Most importantly, you can
use the IR port to perform HotSync operations. You don’t need a cable to do this. This is
very useful if you travel with an infrared-enabled laptop. You simply enable infrared
communication on your laptop and QDA-700 and follow the steps in “Performing an IR
HotSync operation” later in this section.
Preparing Your Computer for Infrared Communication
Before you can perform a HotSync operation using the IR port, the computer you want to
synchronize with must have a built-in or attached enabled infrared port/device and meet
support the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards.
Check or consult your computer reseller if your computer supports infrared
communication
Infrared communication is built into the operating system for Microsoft Windows 98 / 2000
/ XP. Check your computer’s documentation to determine if the computer supports
infrared communication.
To determine the ports used for infrared communication (Windows Only)
1. Choose Settings and then choose Control Panel from the Windows taskbar click
Start.
2. Double-click Infrared.
3. Click the Options tab.
4. Select Enable infrared communication.
The COM port displayed in the drop-down box is the port where your infrared device is
attached. It should be different from any port used by the HotSync Manager.
Make a note of which port is listed as “Providing application support”.
- You need this information to configure the HotSync Manager for infrared
communication. This port is the simulated port. It is the channel through which the
actual infrared communication takes place between your computer and your
QDA-700.
Deselect all other check boxes in the Options tab.
Click Apply and OK.
Configuring HotSync Manager for Infrared Communication
Next you need to go to the HotSync Manager and specify that the infrared port should be
used for the HotSync operation.
To configure HotSync manager for infrared communication on Windows
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. Select Local on the menu.
3. Choose Setup.
4. Click the Local tab.
5. Select the COM port in the Serial Port drop-down box that was given as the simulated
port in the Options tab of the Infrared Monitor.
6. Click OK.
If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using the cradle/cable
while HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication.
- 175 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Performing an IR HotSync operation
After you complete the steps to prepare for an IR HotSync operation it is easy to perform
the actual operation.
To perform an IR HotSync operation
1. Tap the HotSync icon in the Applications Launcher.
2. Tap Local.
3. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/ Handheld.
4. Position the IR port of your QDA-700 within a couple of inches of the infrared port of
your computer.
5. Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation.
Conducting a HotSync Operation Via Modem
You can the QDA-700 internal GSM modem to synchronize your QDA-700 when you are
away from your computer.
The first HotSync operation must be local, using the cradle. After that, you can perform a
modem HotSync operation.
To perform a HotSync operation via modem you must complete the following:
- Configure the Palm Desktop software for use with your modem.
- Configure the Modem preferences on your QDA-700 for use with your modem (Serial
to Modem or IrCOMM to Modem).
Preparing Your Computer
You must perform a few steps to prepare your computer for a modem HotSync operation.
Be sure to perform these steps before you leave your office so that your computer is
ready to receive a call from your QDA-700.
To prepare your computer for a modem HotSync operation on Windows
1. Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on and that no
communications applications, such as fax or telephony software, are running on a
COM port.
Note: Make sure that the computer is disconnected from all online services, such as
America Online (AOL) and CompuServe, to avoid conflicts with the COM port.
2. Start HotSync Manager if it is not already running.
3. Choose Modem from the HotSync Manager menu.
4. Adjust the following options as needed:
Serial Port to identify the port for the modem. If you are unsure of the port
assignment, look at the Modem Properties in the Windows Control Panel.
Speed to determine the speed at which data is transferred. Try the As Fast As
Possible rate first and adjust downward if you experience problems. This setting lets
Palm Desktop software and your QDA-700 find and use the fastest speed.
Modem to identify the modem type or manufacturer. Refer to your modem manual
or faceplate for its type or settings. If you’re not sure of your modem type or your
modem doesn’t match any that appear in the list, select Hayes Basic.
Setup String to identify the setup string for your particular modem. Not all modems
require a setup string. Refer to your modem manual and enter the setup string if
recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Click OK.
- 176 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Preparing Your QDA-700
In addition to preparing your computer, you must perform a few steps to prepare your
QDA-700 for a modem HotSync operation.
To prepare your QDA-700 for a modem HotSync operation
1. Tap Connection icon in the Launcher II
2. Tap the HotSync icon.
3. Enter number in the Phone # field to access the modem connected to your computer.
Note: If you plan to connect to your company’s dial-in server (network modem)
instead of connecting to a computer modem, see “Conducting a HotSync Operation
Via a Network” later in this chapter.
4. Enter a dial prefix (such as “9”) to access an outside line and then tap the Dial Prefix
check box.
Tip: You can enter a comma in the field to introduce a “pause” in the dialing
sequence.
5. Select the Disable call waiting check box to avoid an interruption during the modem
HotSync operation if the phone line you’re using for the QDA-700 has Call Waiting.
6. Select the check box and enter the calling card number if you want to use a calling
card to place the call.
7. Tap OK.
8. Tap the Menu icon.
9. Tap Options and then tap Modem Setup.
10. Enter the settings for more information
Selecting Conduits for a Modem HotSync Operation
You can define which files, applications, or both on your QDA-700 synchronize during a
modem HotSync operation, to minimize the time required to synchronize data. To define
what synchronizes, you use the Conduit Setup dialog.
Applications that do not have a database (such as games) do not synchronize - even if
you select the item in the Conduit Setup dialog.
- 177 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To define which files or applications on your device synchronize during a HotSync
operation:
1. Tap Connection icon in Launcher II
2. Tap the HotSync icon.
3. Tap menu.
4. Tap Options and then tap Conduit Setup.
5. Tap the check boxes to deselect the files and applications that you do not want to
synchronize during a modem HotSync operation in the Conduit Setup dialog. The
default setting is to synchronize all files.
6. Tap OK.
Performing a HotSync Operation Via a Modem
After you prepare your computer and your QDA-700 and select your Conduit Setup
options, you are ready to perform a modem HotSync operation.
To perform a modem HotSync operation
1. Tap the Connection icon in Launcher II.
2. Tap the HotSync icon.
3. Tap the Modem icon to dial the QDA-700 modem and synchronize the applications.
4. Wait for the HotSync operation to complete.
Conducting a HotSync Operation Via a Network
When you use the Network HotSync software, you can take advantage of the LAN and
WAN connectivity available in many office environments. The Network HotSync
software lets you perform a HotSync operation by dialing in to a network or by using a
cradle that is connected to any computer on your LAN or WAN (provided that the
computer connected to the cradle also has the Network HotSync software installed, your
computer is on and the HotSync Manager is running).
- 178 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
The Network HotSync software requires the following:
l Your computer has TCP/IP support installed.
l Both your company’s network system and its remote access server support TCP/IP.
(Your System Administrator has this information.)
l You have a remote access account. (If you don’t have an account, consult your
System Administrator.)
Everything you need to connect to your company’s dial-in server (network modem) is
included with Palm Desktop software and QDA-700 software. You need to activate the
feature, however, on both Palm Desktop software and your QDA-700.
To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation
1. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray.
2. The Windows system tray is usually in the lower right corner on your computer display.
The location may vary depending on the location of the taskbar and the version of
Windows you are using.
3. Choose Network from the HotSync Manager menu.
4. Choose Setup from the HotSync Manager menu.
5. Click the Network tab and make sure that a check mark appears next to your user
name. If no check mark appears, select the check box next to your user name.
6. Click OK.
Connect your QDA-700 to the USB cable and perform a HotSync operation.
The HotSync operation records network information about your computer on your
QDA-700. With this information, your QDA-700 can locate your computer when yo u
perform a HotSync operation over the network.
To prepare your device for a network HotSync operation
1. Tap the Connection icon in Launcher II
2. Tap the HotSync icon.
3. Tap the Menu icon.
4. Tap Options and then tap Modem Sync Prefs.
5. Tap Network.
6. Tap OK.
Using File Link
The File Link feature lets you import Address Book and Memo Pad information into your
QDA-700 from a separate external file such as a company phone list. HotSync Manager
stores the data in a separate category on your Palm Desktop software and your QDA-700.
You can set the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you
perform a HotSync operation.
With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following file formats:
l Comma delimited (.csv).
l Tab delimited (.tsv).
l Memo Pad archive (.mpa).
l Address Book archive (.aba).
l Text (.txt).
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
- 179 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.3 Using Beam
There is an infrared (IR) port located at the right side of your QDA-700. The IR port
supports the IrCOMM implementation of the standards for infrared communication
established by the Infrared Data Association (IrDA). You can beam data to another
IR-enabled Palm OS devices that’s close by, but you can also beam data to a mobile
phone and to any other device that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA
standards and that can read the type of data you’re beaming.
With IR communication, you can send (beam) different kind of applications/data between
devices.
l The record in Date Book, Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad
l All records of the category currently displayed in Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad
l A special Contacts record that you designate as your business card, containing
information you want to exchange with business contacts
l An application installed in RAM memory
l An application installed on an expansion card that is seated in the card slot
To learn how to make use of Beam to exchange information with others, please refer to
the next section.
- 180 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.4 Exchanging Information via Beaming
Your QDA-700 is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that you can use to beam information
to another Palm OS device that’s near by and also has an IR port. The IR port is located
at the right side of the QDA-700, near the SD/MMC memory card slot. You can also beam
over SMS with your QDA-700. This feature is discussed at the end of this chapter.
You can beam the following information between Palm OS connected organizers:
l The record currently displayed in Date Book, Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad.
l All records of the category currently displayed in the Contacts, To Do List, or Memo
Pad applications.
l A special Contacts record that you designate as your business card, containing
information you want to exchange with business contacts.
l An application installed in RAM memory.
For best results, the 2 beaming devices should be between 10 centimeters
(approximately 4 inches) and 1 meter (approximately 39 inches) apart, and the straight
path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles.
Beaming a Business Card
To select a business card for beaming
1. Press the Dial Button on the front of your device and push the 5-way navigator to the
bottom to select Contacts.
2. Create a new entry or select an entry in the Contacts List, which contains the
information you want on your business card.
3. Tap Record in Contacts View.
4. Tap Select Business card.
5. Tap the Menu icon.
6. Tap Yes in the Select Business Card dialog.
Beaming a Record
To beam a record, business card, or category of records
1. Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam.
2. Tap the Menu icon.
3. Tap Record.
4. Choose from the following options:
5. Tap Beam to beam an individual item.
6. Tap Beam Business Card in the Address Book application.
7. Tap Beam Category (for records that are displayed in a category).
8. Use the Graffiti® 2 Command stroke /B to beam the current entry.
9. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving Palm OS device when the
Beam Status dialog appears.
10. Resume working on your QDA-700 when the Beam Status dialog indicates that the
transfer is complete.
- 181 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Beaming an Application
To beam an application
1. Tap the category icon which the application refers to.
2. Tap and hold on the application icon for 2 second to pop up a mini menu.
3. Tap Beam.
Note: Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed.
4. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving Palm OS device when the
Beam Status dialog appears.
5. Resume working on your QDA-700 when the Beam Status dialog indicates that the
transfer is complete.
Receiving Beamed Information
To receive beamed information
1. Turn on your QDA-700.
2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting Palm OS device to open
the Beam Status dialog.
3. Tap Yes.
4. Wait for the Beam Status dialog to indicate that the transfer is complete.
5. Tap OK to display the new entry.
6. The incoming records are placed in the Unfiled category.
Turning Off Beaming
To turn beaming on or off
1. Tap Preference category in Launcher II.
2. Tap General Preferences
3. Tap General from the pick list in the upper right corner.
4. Tap the Beam Receive pick list on the General Preferences dialog
5. Tap On or Off to select the option.
Beaming Over SMS
To beam a message over SMS
1. Display the desired Calendar, Contacts, To Do or Memo record you want to beam.
2. Tap the menu icon.
3. Tap Send Event (Contacts, Category, Item, or Memo, according to which application
you are in).
- 182 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
i.
4.
Select SMS in the Send With dialog.
1.
5.
6.
Enter the SMS device number you want to send to.
You can use the Lookup button to search for phone numbers in your address book
that you have placed in the Mobile category (which appears in the Other pick list of
your Phone Book while in edit mode).
If you have previously entered numbers in this screen, you can recall and reuse
them by selecting one from the To pick list.
Tap the Messages category in Launcher II and select SMS if you need to change
SMS settings and select Details button from the Options menu.
- 183 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
l
Leave Messages on Phone: You can choose to delete messages from the
phone when you retrieve the messages from the phone.
l Return Receipt: You can choose to receive confirmation that an SMS was
delivered.
l Warn Over: You receive a Warning if a message is split in too many parts.
l Message Center: The service center stored into your phone is used if set to
“Auto” and if set to “Custom” you can provide your own.
l Default: Resets the preferences to default.
l Leave message: Unchecked
7. A confirmation dialog asks you if you want to accept this change. Tap on Default to
restore these options to their original values. All preferences from this screen are
stored in the system preferences.
Note: These settings apply to current and subsequent SMS messages. If you choose to
leave messages on your phone, they will be downloaded again the next time you check
for new messages.
- 184 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7.5 Using Palm Desktop
Palm Desktop is a Date Book, To Do List, Contacts, Memo tracker and more! It can be
used as a stand-alone application, or it can be used to view, sort, find, edit, back up, and
add applications to your QDA-700.
Note that the new fields in the updated personal information management applications
(Contacts, Calendar, Tasks and Memos) will only synchronize with corresponding fields
on your handheld. The new fields will not synchronize to your QDA-700.
To install Palm Desktop
Note: You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on some operating
systems.
1. Insert the Software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
2. If the installation procedure does not starts, click Start and choose Run, type
X:\setup.exe (where X is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive) and click OK.
3. In the language dialog, select the language for the installation, and click OK. The
installer will proceed.
4. When you see another window with the welcome message Welcome to the
InstallShield Wizard for Palm OS Desktop, click Next
5. Read the details of the license agreement. Select I accept and click Next to proceed.
You must accept the license agreement or the installation will not proceed.
6. For most users, select Complete setup type and press Next to proceed. Setup will
install the Palm Desktop software to your computer (C:\Program
Files\PalmSource\Desktop) accordingly.
If you want to customize the setup type, choose Custom setup type and press Next.
You will be given the option of installing Palm Desktop and Hotsync Manager
(Recommended for advanced users only)
Or you can also change the program folder to another by clicking Change and enter
the desired installation path.
7. Click Install and setup will copy the necessary files to your computer. To change or
review your setting, please click Back.
8. When the setup finished, click Finish to exit the setup wizard.
A Palm OS Desktop icon appears on the Windows desktop of your computer, and a new
program group called Palm OS Desktop appears in Start menu also.
First Glance of Palm Desktop
To run Palm Desktop, do one of the following:
l Double-click the Palm OS Desktop icon on the Windows desktop of your computer
l Click Start and select Program Files, select Palm OS Desktop program group and
click Palm OS Desktop.
Palm OS Desktop runs and the following screen displays:
- 185 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Palm OS Desktop software gives you access to several applications. When you start
Palm OS Desktop software, the Date Book application opens by default. Use the Options
command on the Tools menu to select a different application to open by default.
To open another application, click an application button in the Launch bar, select the
application from the View menu, or press the keyboard shortcut listed for it on the View
menu.
Because the Launch bar can be customized, you can display small or large buttons,
change the order of the application buttons, or hide an application button. See
Customizing the Launch Bar for more information.
Icon
Date Book
Details
Schedule and set alarms for single and recurring events. View
calendar information in daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly views.
Contacts
Track your business and personal contacts. Store up to five contact
numbers and four custom fields for each Contacts record.
To Do List
View and manage your tasks in a simple list format. Set priorities
and due dates for each task and mark tasks that are complete.
Memo Pad
Save notes for meetings or other events not associated with a
Palm OS Desktop software application.
Install Tool
Select applications to install automatically on your handheld the
next time you perform a HotSync operation.
- 186 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using the Desktop Toolbar
Use the Desktop toolbar to quickly access the most used commands, check if private
records are being hidden, or change the current user.
Save All
Save changes in all Palm OS Desktop software applications.
Print
Print records in the current Palm OS Desktop software
application.
Cut
Remove the selection from the current location and place it on
the Clipboard.
Copy
Copy the selection to the Clipboard.
Paste
Paste Clipboard information to the current selection.
Undo
Reverse the previous action, if possible.
Find
Display the Find dialog box, where you can search for text
across all Palm OS Desktop software applications.
Security
Choose whether private records are visible, hidden, or masked.
User selector
Display the current user name. If there is more than one user,
click the selector to select a different user from the list.
Finding Information
Use the Find command to search for information in all Palm OS Desktop software
applications at once. Using the Find command searches all the text in all records,
including attached notes. However, the Find command does not search Category, Date,
Time, or Priority.
To search for text
1. From the Edit menu, choose Find.
2. In the Find dialog box, type the text to find in the Find What box.
To limit the search, select the Match Whole Words Only and the Match Case check
box.
3. Click Find.
Records containing the search criteria appear in the list box.
4. Double-click a record in the list box to review or edit the record.
If Extensions are installed, select the Search Extensions check box to search for the
information in the Extensions.
- 187 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Saving Changes
Palm OS Desktop software automatically saves your information when you:
l Exit the Palm OS Desktop software application.
l Change users.
l Perform a HotSync operation.
Tip On the Tools tab in the Options dialog box, select the check box Auto -Save Every xx
Minutes to have Palm OS Desktop software periodically save all changes to your records.
See Options Dialog Box (Tools Tab) for more information.
You can also manually save changes to the Palm OS Desktop software application.
To manually save changes, do one of the following
l Click the Save All button on the Desktop toolbar.
l From the File menu, choose Save All.
l Press Ctrl+S.
Printing Records
To print records
1. From the File menu, choose Print.
2. In the Print dialog box, select printer and print job options.
3. Click OK.
The available options are based on the current Palm OS Desktop software application
and view. In addition to standard Windows print options, such as selecting the printer and
number of copies, the following options are available.
- 188 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Date Book
Today
Prints the events for the currently selected day.
Dates (list format)
Prints the event(s) on the day or range of days that you
specify in a list format.
Tip: Click the Calendar icon to use the Select Date dialog
box to select a date.
Months (month format)
Prints the event(s) in the months or range of months that you
specify in a monthly calendar format.
Tip: Click the Calendar icon to use the Select Date dialog
box to select a date.
Print Notes check box
Prints notes attached to the events that you print.
Contacts
Viewed Category
Prints all the records in the category you are viewing.
Choose All from the Category selector in the Contacts
window to view all records.
Selection
Prints only the selected records.
Print Notes
Prints notes attached to the records that you print.
Print Phones Only
Prints only the phone numbers of records in the category you
are viewing. Choose All from the Category selector in the
Contacts window to view all records.
To Do List
Viewed Category
Prints all the items in the category you are viewing. Choose
All from the Category selector in the To Do List window to
view all To Do items.
Selection
Prints only the selected items.
Print Notes check box
Prints notes attached to items that you print.
Memo Pad
- 189 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Viewed Category
Prints all the memos in the category you are viewing.
Choose All from the Category selector in the Memo Pad
window to view all memos.
Memos From/To
Prints a range of memos. Enter numbers in the From and To
boxes to specify the range.
Selection
Prints only the selected memos.
Customizing the Launch Bar
You can customize the Launch bar by displaying either small or large application buttons,
changing the order of the application buttons, or hiding an application's button.
To change the application buttons to small or large icons
1. Right-click the Launch bar, and then choose Small Icons, or right-click the Launch
bar, and then select Large Icons.
To change the order of the application buttons
1. Right-click the Launch bar, and then choose Customize.
2. Select the name of the application to move, and then click the Move arrows.
To hide an application's button
1. Right-click the button of the application you want to hide, and then choose Hide.
Tip: To redisplay an application's button on the Launch bar, from the View menu,
select the application's name.
To make the Launch bar wider or narrower
1. Place the pointer between the Launch bar and View pane.
2. When the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the border to resize the
Launch bar.
Customizing the Look of Palm OS Desktop Software Using Themes
If you want to change the color of the Launch bar, Palm OS Desktop software background,
toolbar, and highlighting color, you can select different themes in the Options dialog box.
To change the colors on Palm OS Desktop software
1. From the Tools menu, choose Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click the Themes tab.
3. Select a theme.
4. Click OK.
Note: To redisplay the original settings for Palm OS Desktop software, select Default
Theme.
- 190 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting Preferences
To set the preferences for a Palm OS Desktop software application
1. Click the application's button on the Launch bar.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
3. Select or enter the options you want.
4. Click OK.
- 191 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Contacts Overview
Use Contacts to manage names, addresses, phone numbers, and other information for
each person you know. Organize, view, and print Contacts records by category. Mark
confidential records as private and mask them or hide them from others' view. If your
computer has a configured modem, use the Auto Dialer to quickly connect with people in
your Contacts. Quickly add records created in another program using the Import feature.
Creating Contacts Records
To create an Contacts record:
1. Click the New Address button.
2. Type name, title, company, and address information in the appropriate boxes.
3. Under Contact Info, click a label selector and select a label for each type of
information, such as Work Phone or E-Mail. Type the appropriate information in the
box.
4. Click on the Primary Contact pick list button to select which contact displays on your
handheld as the primary contact in the View pane.
5. (Optional) Type Anniversary, Birthday, or other information for records in the custom
boxes.
6. After you finish creating the record, click OK.
Tip: To create more than one record, click the New button instead of OK.
You can also add the following information
On any tab:
1. Click the All radio button to see all of the available categories. Click the check box
beside each category to select or deselect it. One address can be assigned to
multiple categories.
2. Click on the Selected radio button to see just the categories that the address is
assigned to. Click on the Edit Categories button to create new categories, delete
existing categories, or rename existing categories.
3. Select the Private check box to mark the record private.
On the Note tab:
l Type any additional information. Notes can contain approximately 13,000 words.
Please note the following fields in Palm Desktop are not supported in your QDA-700:
l Prefix
l English Name
l Profession
l Assistant Name
l Assistant Phone
l Nickname
l Anniversary
l Birthday
- 192 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Editing Contacts Records
To change or add information for a record:
1. Double-click the record in the View pane or Record pane.
2. Edit name, address, and contact information in the appropriate boxes.
3. Click a label selector and select a label for each piece of information. Type the
appropriate information in the box.
4. Click the Primary Contact pick list to select which contact displays on your
handheld as the primary contact in the View pane.
5. Click the All radio button to see all of the available categories. Click the check box
beside each category to select or deselect it. One event can be assigned to multiple
categories.
6. Click on the Selected radio button to see just the categories that the event is
assigned to. Click on the Edit Categories button to create new categories, delete
existing categories, or rename existing categories.
7. (Optional) Select the Private check box to mark the record private.
8. (Optional) Type Anniversary, Birthday, or other information for records in the custom
boxes.
9. Type any additional information. Notes can contain approximately 13,000 words.
Changing the Contacts View
Note: Changing the way you view records in the Contacts does not affect the way they
display on your handheld.
To change the View pane format
l Click a view tab at the bottom of the View pane.
Note: When viewing Large Icons or Small Icons, records that have information in the
Company field but not in the Last Name or First Name fields display a business icon so
that you can easily distinguish between businesses and individuals.
To change the list view columns
1. From the View menu, choose Show Columns.
2. Select the columns you want to appear in the Contacts List View pane.
3. To move a column, select the column and click the Move arrows.
4. Click OK.
To change the displayed fields and sort order
l Click the Sort By selector and select Last Name, First Name or Company Name,
Last Name.
To change the primary contact and specify contact labels
1. Double-click an entry in the View pane and perform any of the following actions:
l
l
2.
Click an option button under Contact Info to select which contact displays on your
handheld and as the primary contact in the View pane. (This is the only contact for
the entry that you can dial automatically.)
Click a contact label and select a new label from the list.
Click OK.
- 193 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To specify custom field labels
Each Contacts record contains four custom fields that you can rename. Any changes you
make to the custom field labels will appear in all the Contacts records.
1.
2.
3.
From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
In the Preferences dialog box under Custom Labels, click a box and type a name of
up to 15 characters.
Click OK.
Deleting Contacts
Contacts that you delete in Palm OS Desktop software are deleted from your handheld
the next time you perform a HotSync operation. If you choose to archive deleted records,
the records are added to an archive file the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To delete a record
1. Click the record.
2. Press the Delete key.
Tip: If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option, you can delete a
record without viewing the confirmation box by pressing Shift+Delete.
Looking Up Contacts
Use the Look up box to quickly select addresses that begin with the same letter. The Look
up feature matches, letter by letter, the first characters of an address, which are
determined by the sort order.
Tip: To select a different sort order, click the Sort By selector.
To use the Look up box
1. Type the first character of the address. The character appears in the Look up box
and the list scrolls to the first address that begins with that letter.
If you type another letter, the list scrolls to the first address that starts with those two
letters.
Important: If you type a character that does not begin an address, the first record in
the Contacts is selected, and no character displays in the Look up box.
2. To look up addresses that begin with a different first character, delete the current
character(s) in the Look up box and type a new character.
- 194 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using Auto Dial
If you have a modem configured on your computer, you can automatically dial the contact
number that displays in the Primary Contact column of the Contacts List view.
To use the auto dial feature
1. Select an Contacts entry.
Tip: To select a different contact number, double-click the address. Under Contact
Info, choose a different contact number to be your primary contact.
2. Right-click the record and choose Dial from the menu.
3. Click Dial.
This action automatically dials the number using the modem.
4. When you complete the telephone call, click Hang Up.
- 195 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Date Book Overview
Use Date Book to schedule and manage single or repeating events. Set untimed events
to remember special days such as birthdays or anniversaries. Set an alarm to remind you
of important events and use the Note tab to record information such as directions or
background information regarding the event. View and print your calendar in daily, weekly,
monthly, or yearly format.
Scheduling Events Using the New Event Dialog Box
To schedule an event using the New Event dialog box
1. Click the New Event button.
2. Type a description in the Event box.
3. Complete the Start and End Time boxes by typing in the boxes or clicking the Watch
icon to display the Select Time dialog box.
l You can set the time at 5-minute intervals.
l To create an untimed event, click the No Time button.
Note: You can create an event with a total duration of up to 23:59:59 hours, and
span midnight. If the end time for an event is sooner than the start time, Date
Book interprets this as an event that wraps over to the next day.
Tip: You can select a different time zone for a particular event. The View pane
will display the event relative to the current time zone. The Edit view will display
the event with its actual time zone and corresponding time.
You can enter the hour and minutes as a single number. For example, type 830 for 8:30,
followed by A for A.M. or P for P.M.
4.
5.
Select the date by typing in the Date box or clicking the calendar.
You can also perform the following actions:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
6.
Click the Note tab to attach a note to the event.
Click the Repeat tab to create a repeating event. See Scheduling Repeating
Events for more information.
Type in a Location, such as the room number where a meeting will be held.
Select the Alarm check box to set an alarm. See Using Alarms for more
information.
Select the Private check box to mark the event private.
Assign your event to one or more categories. See Assigning Records to
Categories for more information.
Click OK.
Scheduling Events in Day or Week View
Tip: To schedule an event based on a To Do List or Contacts entry, simply drag the entry
to a timeslot in the View pane.
To schedule an event directly in the View pane
1. Click a time slot in the View pane.
2. Type the description.
3. Press Enter.
- 196 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
You can also:
l Change the event's duration by dragging the bottom of the event box to a new time.
(The default duration is one hour.)
l Right-click the event to display a menu and select:
Delete
To delete the event.
Edit Event
To display the Edit Event dialog box to edit any
information about the event, mark the event private,
or create a repeating event.
Repeat
To assign or change a repeat pattern.
Note
To create or attach a note.
Forward as vCal
To open your desktop E-Mail application and send
the event to someone as an e-mail attachment.
Tip: You can create an event in a slot in which an event is already scheduled.
In Day view
Click the time to the left of the slot.
In Week view
Click the date column heading, then click the time
to the left of the slot.
Scheduling Untimed Events in Day or Week View
To schedule an event directly in the View pane
1. Click the untimed event slot in the View pane.
Tip: You can create an event in a slot in which an event is already scheduled.
2.
3.
In Day view
Click the diamond to the left of the slot.
In Week view
Click the date column heading, then click the diamond to
the left of the slot.
Type the description.
Press Enter.
You can also:
l
Right-click the event to display a menu and select:
Delete
To delete the event.
Edit Event
To display the Edit Event dialog box to edit any
information about the event, mark the event
private, or create a repeating event.
Repeat
To assign or change a repeat pattern.
Note
To create or attach a note.
- 197 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Forward as vCal
To open your desktop E-Mail application and
send the event to someone in an e-mail
message.
Scheduling Repeating Events
You can change an existing event to a repeating event, or select repeat options while you
are creating an event.
To schedule a repeating event
1. Click an event or time slot in the Day or Week view to select it.
2. Click the Edit Event button.
3. In the Edit Event dialog box, click the Repeat tab.
4. Select the repeat interval for the event.
5. Select options for the interval:
6.
Day
Select the number of days between occurrences and the end
date.
Week
Select the number of weeks between occurrences, the end date,
and the day of the week the event occurs.
Month
Select the number of months between occurrences, the end date,
and whether to repeat by the day or date of the month.
Year
Select the number of years between occurrences, and the end
date.
Type the final event date in the End Date box, or click the Calendar button to select
an end date from an easy-to-use calendar format.
Tip: If you do not specify an end date, the event repeats until the last date in the year
2031. This does not require any additional memory on your handheld or computer.
You can select a different time zone for a particular event. The View pane will display
the event relative to the current time zone. The Edit view will display the event with
its actual time zone and corresponding time.
Note: You can create an event for a total duration of up to 23:59:59 hours, and it can
span midnight. If the end time for an event is sooner than the start time, Date Book
interprets this as an event that wraps over to the next day.
7.
8.
Check the repeat pattern to verify that it is set correctly.
Tip: If you have scheduled a monthly repeat, you may be prompted to select
whether to repeat the event in the fourth or last week of the month.
Click OK.
- 198 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Editing Events
You can edit events in Day view or Week view.
Note: If you are in Month or Year view, double-click the event to display Day view where
you can edit the event.
To edit an event
1. Drag the event to a new time or date to quickly reschedule an event.
2. Click an event’s Alarm icon to edit an alarm.
3. Click an event’s Note icon to edit a note.
4. Click an event’s Repeat icon to edit the repeat pattern.
5. Double-click an event? description area to change an event's description.
6. Drag the bottom edge of the event box to change an event's end time.
7. Right-click an event and choose a command to edit any information about an event,
including setting an alarm, changing the repeat pattern, or attaching a note.
Note: In Month view, you can edit an event in the Record pane. Click Show Daily to
display the Record pane.
Deleting Events
You can delete events in Day view, Week view, or the Record pane in Month view. Events
that you delete in Palm OS Desktop software are deleted from your handheld the next
time you perform a HotSync operation. If you choose to archive deleted events, the
events are added to an archive file the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To delete an event
1.
2.
From Day view, Week view, or the Record pane in Month view, select the event.
Press the Delete key.
Tip: If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option on the General
tab in the Options dialog box, you can delete a record without viewing the
confirmation box by pressing Shift+Delete.
Editing Repeating Events
You can edit a single occurrence, the current and future occurrences, or all occurrences
of a repeating event.
Important: Editing one piece of information about a repeating event may affect other
occurrences of the event. Refer to the following information before editing repeating
events.
- 199 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Type of edit
Result
Change one occurrence of a repeating Changes that occurrence to a single
event
event. Does not change any other
occurrences.
Change the repeat interval to None
Changes that occurrence to a single
event. Removes all instances of the
event that occur after the event date on
which the setting is changed.
Change the start date
Adjusts the end date to maintain the
duration of the repeating event.
Change the date of an occurrence, (for Makes the new date the start date of the
example, from January 14 to January 15) repeating event. Adjusts the end date to
and apply the change to all occurrences
maintain the duration of the repeating
event, and deletes previous occurrences.
Change the repeat interval and apply the
change to all occurrences
Change any of the following items:
l Start time
l End time
l Note
l Alarm
l Private check box
l Location
Change the event description in the View
pane
Creates a new repeating event.
Choose to apply the changes to the
current event only, or to future
occurrences, or to all occurrences.
Changes
the
description
occurrences of the event.
for
all
Deleting Repeating Events
You can delete a single occurrence of a repeating event, the current and future
occurrences, or all occurrences of a repeating event. Events that you delete in Palm OS
Desktop software are deleted from your handheld the next time you perform a HotSync
operation. If you choose to archive deleted events, the events are added to an archive file
the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To delete a repeating event
1. From Day view, Week view, or the Record pane in Month view, select the event.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
3. Select an option from the Repeating Event message box:
Current
Deletes only the selected occurrence
Future
Deletes the selected occurrence and all future occurrences
All
Deletes all occurrences
If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option, select Yes in the
confirmation box.
Tip: You can delete a record without viewing the confirmation box by pressing
Shift+Delete.
- 200 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting Date Book Options
You can choose options that configure the Date Book in the Date Book tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
To set Date Book options
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog box, perform one or more of the following actions:
l
l
l
3.
To change the displayed time in Day view, click the Workday Begins selector
and select a time from the list.
To change the day the week begins in Week, Month, and Year view, click the
Week Begins selector and select a day from the list.
To set an alarm for all new events, select the Alarm Preset check box.
n Click the Time Interval selector and select from Minutes Before, Hours
Before, or Days Before.
n Click the Time measurement selector and select a number between 0
and 99.
Click OK.
Alarm Manager Overview
The Alarm Manager enables Palm OS Desktop software to sound alarm tones and
display alarm notification messages. You can configure Palm OS Desktop software to run
the Alarm Manager whenever you start your computer, only when Palm OS Desktop
software is running, or to not use the Alarm Manager.
To set an alarm, you must assign the alarm to a particular Date Book event.
Using Alarms
You can set an alarm for individual timed and untimed events, or a default alarm for all
events. The alarm will sound at the specified time interval before the event is scheduled
to begin.
Tip: If you set a default alarm, you can override the default settings by changing the Time
Interval and Time Measurement settings in the New/Edit Event dialog box for a particular
event.
To set an alarm for an event
1. Create a new event or double-click an existing event.
2. In the New/Edit Event dialog box, select the Alarm check box.
3. Click the time interval selector and select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
4. Type a number between 0 and 99 in the Time Measurement box.
5. Click OK.
To set a default alarm for all new events
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
2. Select the Alarm Preset check box.
3. Click the time interval selector and select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
4. Type a number between 0 and 99 in the Time Measurement box.
5. Click OK.
- 201 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Editing Alarms
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
reset an existing alarm
Click the event's Alarm icon.
Click the time interval selector and select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
Type a number between 0 and 99 in the Time Measurement box.
Click OK.
To cancel an existing alarm
1. Click the event’s Alarm icon.
2. Deselect the Alarm check box.
3. Click OK.
Setting Alarm Options
You can configure when alarms are available and how you are notified in the Alarms tab
of the Options dialog box.
To set Alarm options
1. From the Tools menu, choose Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click the Alarms tab and click one of the following actions:
Always Available
Click this option if you want alarm
notifications to appear regardless of
whether Palm OS Desktop software is
running.
Available Only When the Palm OS Click this option if you want alarm
Desktop Is Running
notifications to appear only when Palm
OS Desktop software is running.
Disabled
Click this option if you do not want alarm
notifications to appear on your computer.
3.
4.
Select the alarm notification options you want:
Bring Alarm Dialog to the Front
Select this option so that when the alarm
notification appears it displays on top of all
other Windows applications that are
running.
Play Audible Notification with Select this option if you want an alarm to
Alarm Dialog
sound when the alarm notification
appears.
Use Custom Alarm Sound
Select this option to play a specific sound
when an alarm notification message
appears. Click Browse to select the WAV
sound file you want. To hear a sound,
select the sound file, and then click the
Play button.
Click OK.
- 202 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Using Day View
Use Day view to see the most detail about a day’s events, and to see a list of To Do List
items or Contacts records. To display the Day view, click the Day tab on the bottom edge
of the Date Book window.
Using Month View
Use Month view to see an entire month of events and schedule new events. To display
Month view, click the Month tab on the bottom edge of the Date Book window.
Using Week View
Use Week view to see and edit an entire week of events. To display the Week view, click
the Week tab on the bottom edge of the Date Book window.
Using Year View
Use Year view to see an entire year of events and schedule new events. To display the
Year view, click the Year tab on the bottom edge of the Date Book window.
- 203 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Memo Pad Overview
Use Memo Pad to create and store notes and information that are not associated with
other Palm OS Desktop software applications. You can create memos that contain as
many as approximately 13,000 words, or import files that are even larger. View memos by
alphabetical order or the order in which they display on your handheld. Assign memos to
categories to organize information, and mark memos private so that you can mask them
or hide them from view. Print all memos or only memos that you specify.
Using Memo Pad
Use Memo Pad to record agendas and notes from meetings, information you often need
but can never remember, and so on.
Creating Memos
To create a memo
1. Click the New Memo button in the View pane, or start typing the memo's text to
create a new memo.
2. Type your memo text.
You can use any characters, including carriage returns. You can enter as much as
64KB of text, which is approximately 13,000 words.
You can also perform the following functions:
l
l
l
Click the All radio button to see all of the available categories. Click the check box
beside each category to select or deselect it. One memo can be assigned to multiple
categories.
Click on the Selected radio button to see just the categories that the memo is
assigned to. Click on the Edit Categories button to create new categories, delete
existing categories, or rename existing categories.
Select the Private check box to mark the memo private.
Editing Memos
To edit a memo
1.
In the Memo List, click the memo you want to edit.
l
l
l
To change or assign a category, click the Category drop-down arrow for that
memo. Then click Change Category and select a category from the list.
To edit the memo text, select the memo text to change in the Record pane and
type the new text. You can also click in the Record pane and type new text.
To mark or unmark a memo private, select or deselect the Private check box.
2. Click the Memo list to save the changes
Tip: If you want to edit the memo in the Edit Memo dialog box, double-click a memo in the
Memo List, or select the memo and click the Edit Memo button.
- 204 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Deleting Memos
Memos that you delete in Palm OS Desktop software are deleted from your handheld the
next time you perform a HotSync operation. If you choose to archive deleted memos, the
memos are added to an archive file the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To delete a memo
1. Select the memo you want to delete.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Tip: If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option, you can delete a
memo without viewing the confirmation box by pressing Shift+Delete.
Changing the Memo Order
Changing the way you view memos in Palm OS Desktop software does not affect the way
they display on your handheld.
Tip: Click and drag the pane divider in between the two panes to resize the current view
and the Record pane. When selected, the pane divider appears as a dark bar and the
pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.
To change the Memo Pad view
1. From the View menu, choose Show Columns.
2. Select the columns you want to appear in the Memo Pad View pane.
3. To move a column, select the column and click the Move arrows.
4. Click OK.
To sort the Memo Pad columns
1. Click the Sort By selector in the Memo Pad window.
2. Click an option:
Alphabetical
Sort alphabetically by the text of the memo.
Order on Handheld
Sort by the order memos display on your handheld.
- 205 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To Do List Overview
Use To Do List to manage tasks. Set priorities for each To Do item, associate items with
categories, and mark confidential items private and mask or hide them. View your tasks
by due date, priority, or category. To Do items also display in the Date Book's Day view To
Do List.
Using the To Do List
Use the To Do List to create reminders for tasks.
Creating To Do Items
To create a To Do item
1. Click the New To Do button in the View pane.
2. Type a description of the task in the To Do box.
You can use line returns and type approximately 50 words.
3. Click OK.
You can also perform the following actions:
l Select a priority level. The default is 1.
l Set a due date by typing in the Date box, by clicking the Date selector and selecting
a date from the list, or by clicking the calendar.
l Click the All radio button to see all of the available categories. Click the check box
beside each category to select or deselect it. One To Do item can be assigned to
multiple categories.
l Click on the Selected radio button to see just the categories that the To Do item is
assigned to. Click on the Edit Categories button to create new categories, delete
existing categories, or rename existing categories.
l Click the Note tab to attach a note to the item. (Notes can contain approximately
13,000 words.)
l Select the Private check box to mark the item private.
Editing To Do Items
To edit a To Do item
Double-click the item entry in the View pane and edit the item’s description and other
information.
If the following items appear in the View pane, you can:
l Click the item’s Completed Status column to mark the item complete.
l Click the due date and select a new date from the list.
Select Choose Date to select a date from an easy-to-use calendar format.
l Click the category and select a new category.
l Click the Note icon to edit the attached note.
- 206 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Deleting To Do Items
To Do Items that you delete in Palm OS Desktop software are deleted from your handheld
the next time you perform a HotSync operation. If you choose to archive deleted To Do
items, the items are added to an archive file the next time you perform a HotSync
operation.
To delete a To Do item
1. Select the To Do item you want to delete.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Tip: If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option, you can delete an
item without viewing the confirmation box by pressing Shift+Delete.
Changing the To Do List View
Changing the way you view items in To Do List affects the way items display in Date Book
Day view, but does not affect the way items display on your handheld.
Tip: Click and drag the pane divider in between the two panes to resize the view and
Record panes. When selected the pane divider appears as a dark bar and the pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow.
To change the To Do List view
1. From the View menu, choose Show Columns.
2. Select the columns you want to appear in the To Do List View pane.
3. To move a column, select the column and click the Move arrows.
4. Click OK.
To sort the To Do List columns
1. Click the Sort By selector in the To Do List window.
2. Select the order by which to sort To Do items.
Priority, Due Date
Sorts by priority and then the due date.
Due Date, Priority
Sorts by the due date and then priority.
Category, Due Date
Sorts by category and then due date.
Category, Priority
Sorts by category and then priority.
- 207 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Working with Records
Using Notes
You can add notes to records in most Palm OS Desktop software applications. When you
add a note to a record, a Note icon displays in the Note column.
To add a note to a record
1. From one of the following places, click the Note tab
l Contacts - New/Edit Address dialog box
l Date Book - New/Edit Event dialog box
l To Do List - New/Edit To Do dialog box
Tip: You can open the Edit dialog box for an existing record by double-clicking the
record in the View pane.
2. Type the text of the note.
You can type any text in the note, including carriage returns.
3.
Click OK.
To edit an existing note
l Click the Note icon to quickly open the Note tab and edit an existing note.
Tip: From Date Book, you can also select Note from the event’s right-click menu.
Marking Records Private
You can mark any record private. A padlock icon in the View pane or Record pane
denotes a private record. Marking a record private allows you to mask or hide the record
so that others cannot view it.
To mark a record private
1. Select the record to mark.
2. Open the Edit menu.
l From Contacts, select the Edit Address command.
l From Date Book, select the Edit Event command.
l From To Do List, select the Edit To Do command.
l From Memo Pad, select the Edit Memo command.
3. In the Edit dialog box, select the Private check box.
4. Click OK.
Masking, Hiding, and Showing Private Records
A padlock icon in the View pane denotes a private record. If you use a password, you
must enter it to show masked or hidden private reco rds.
Masking private records
l Places a shaded bar over all private records in Palm OS Desktop software.
l Includes records in the Total record number in the status bar of Contacts, Memo Pad,
and To Do List.
Hiding private records
l Hides all private records in Palm OS Desktop software.
l Removes records from the Total record number in the status bar of Contacts, Memo
Pad, and To Do List.
- 208 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To mask private records
1. From the View menu, choose Mask Private Records.
2. If a confirmation box appears, click OK.
To hide private records
1. From the View menu, choose Hide Private Records.
2. If a confirmation box appears, click OK.
To show private records
1. From the View menu, choose Show Private Records.
2. If you have a password assigned, type it in the password dialog box and click OK.
Tip: You can also choose to show, hide, or mask private records by clicking the Security
icon on the Desktop toolbar and choosing an option from the list.
Adding a Time or Date Stamp
You can paste the current time or date into a memo or a text box in any Palm OS Desktop
software application when you are in edit mode.
To add a time stamp
l Press Ctrl+Shift+T.
To add a date stamp
l Press Ctrl+Shift+D.
Reverting Changes
If you have made changes since opening Palm OS Desktop software or last saving
changes, you can use the Revert command to discard the changes.
Palm OS Desktop software only reverts changes you have made to the information you
are viewing currently. For example, you can revert your Contacts without reverting your
Date Book.
To revert changes
1. Open Palm OS Desktop software to revert.
2. From the File menu, choose Revert.
3. In the confirmation box, click OK.
Fixing Corrupt Records
The Category column in some records may display an invalid category name, or the
category may be blank. This can occur in records in any Palm OS Desktop software
application, and when it does, the records are corrupt and need to be repaired.
To fix corrupt records
1. From the Tools menu, choose Options.
2. Click the Tools tab.
3. Click the Check Now button.
4. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
- 209 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Archiving and Deleting
Using Archives
You can archive records that you delete or purge from your handheld or Palm OS
Desktop software. Archiving records allows you to conserve space on your handheld,
while ensuring information is available if you need it in the future. When you perform a
HotSync operation, archived records from the handheld and Palm OS Desktop software
are added to the archive files.
In addition, you can create a backup copy of information by exporting information from a
Palm OS Desktop software application to an archive file. Exporting information to an
archive file does not remove information from Palm OS Desktop software or your
handheld.
Archive files are stored on your desktop computer. When you archive deleted records in
Contacts, Date Book, To Do List, or Memo Pad, a separate file for each application is
created. If you use the Export command to create an archive file, all records for an
application are stored in one file.
You can work with records in the archive file, or restore records in an archive file to the
current application. Most commands you use in Palm OS Desktop software are available
in archive files. When you delete or purge records from an archive file, they are
permanently deleted the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
Deleting and Archiving Records
You can save deleted records in an archive file, which you can view or restore at a later
time. If you delete records without saving them in an archive file, the records are
permanently removed.
Records that you delete are deleted from your handheld the next time you perform a
HotSync operation. If you choose to archive deleted records, the records are added to an
archive file the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To set deletion and archive file options
1. Choose Options from the Tools menu.
2. On the General tab, select or deselect the Confirm Before Deleting Records and
the Archive Deleted Records check boxes.
Tip: If you selected the Confirm Before Deleting Records option, you can delete
records without confirmation by selecting the records and pressing Shift+Delete.
3. Click the OK button.
Purging and Archiving Events and To Do List Items
You can purge records in Date Book and To Do List. Purging removes records that meet
specified criteria. You can purge events that occurred more than one week ago and To Do
List items that are complete. If you purge records without saving them in an archive file,
the records are permanently removed.
Records that you purge are deleted from your handheld the next time you perform a
HotSync operation. If you choose to archive purged records, the records are added to an
archive file the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
- 210 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To purge an event or To Do List item
1. From To Do List, choose Purge Completed To Do’s from the Tools menu.
From Date Book, choose Purge Events from the Tools menu. For events, you can
click the Delete Events Older Than selector and select a time. The default is one
week.
2. Select the Archive check box to save purged records in an archive file.
3. Click the OK button.
Archiving Individual Records
You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to move or copy Contacts, To Do List,
or Memo Pad records to an archive file that you select.
To archive records using Cut, Copy, and Paste
1. Select the records.
2. Click the Cut or Copy button on the Desktop toolbar.
3. Choose Open Archive from the File menu.
4. Open the Archive file to which you want to add the records.
5. Click the Paste button on the Desktop toolbar.
Opening Archive Files
You can open an archive file only for the current application. When an archive file opens,
the information displays in the same way as in the current application. Palm OS Desktop
software provides two visual clues to remind you that you are working with an archive file.
l
l
The title bar displays the name of the archive file.
The status bar displays the word archive.
To open an archive file
1. Open the application used to create the archive file.
2. Choose Open Archive from the File menu.
3. Select the archive file from the Open dialog box.
4. Click the Open button.
Restoring Individual Records
You can restore individual records from a Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad archive file
to the current application.
To restore individual records from an archive file
1. Open the archive file that contains the record to restore or view.
2. Select the records.
3. Click the Cut or Copy button on the Desktop toolbar.
4. Click the application’s button on the Launch Bar.
5. Click the Paste button on the Desktop toolbar.
- 211 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Categories
Using Categories
You can use categories in all Palm OS Desktop applications to group records for easy,
collective management and review. You can create as many as 254 unique categories for
each application. Use categories to sort, review, and print elements in groups.
Creating Categories
You can create as many as 254 unique categories.
To create a category
1. From the Tools menu, choose Categories.
2. Click New .
3. Type a category name.
Category names are case sensitive and can contain up to 31 characters.
4. Click OK.
Assigning Records to Categories
By default, new records are assigned to the current category of the view. If the Category
is All, records go into Unfiled. You can assign records to a specific category, and then
apply a category filter so that only records in a specific category display.
To assign a record to one or more categories
1. Click the List view tab in the appropriate Palm OS Desktop software application.
2. Click the record in the View pane.
3. Click the pick list arrow in the Category column, then select Change Category.
4. Click the check box next to each category that you want to put the record in.
To assign several records to a category
1. Click the first record, and then press the Ctrl key and click additional records.
2. Right-click one of the selected records in the View pane.
3. Select Change Category from the menu.
4. Select the new categories from the list.
Displaying Records by Category
You can apply a category filter so that only records in a specific category display.
To display records by category
1. Click the Category selector above the View pane.
2. Select a category from the list.
Tip: To see all the records, click the All category.
- 212 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Renaming Categories
When you rename a category, all records in the category update to the new category
name.
To rename a category
1. From the Tools menu, choose Categories.
2. Click a category title.
3. Click Rename.
4. Type a category name.
Category names can contain up to 31 characters.
5. Click OK.
Deleting Categories
You can delete any category except All and Unfiled.
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
delete a category
Choose Categories from the Tools menu.
Click the category title to delete.
Click the Delete button.
After reading the warning message, click Yes.
Importing and Exporting Overview
There are many ways to transfer information between Palm OS Desktop software and
other software applications.
Supported Import and Export File Formats
Palm OS Desktop software can import and export information in the formats below.
Many other Microsoft Windows applications can import or export comma delimited values,
tab delimited values, or text files.
Archive file formats can only be used with Palm OS Desktop software. Use the Archive
file formats to share information with other handheld users or to create a copy of your
important information.
Note: The Palm OS archive formats (dba, aba, tda, mpa) created by Palm OS Cobalt are
not backward compatible with earlier versions of Palm Desktop.
Date Book
Date Book Archive (*.dba)
vCal File (*.vcs)
Contacts
Address Archive (*.aba)
Comma Separated (*.csv, *.txt)
Tab Separated Values (*.tab, *.tsv, *.txt)
vCard File (*.vcf)
- 213 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To Do List
To Do Archive (*.tda)
Memo Pad
Memo Pad Archive (*.mpa)
Comma Separated (*.csv, *.txt)
Tab Separated Values (*.tab, *.tsv, *.txt)
Text (*.txt)
Importing Information from Archive Files
To import information from an archive file
1. Open the Palm OS Desktop software application.
2. If you are importing records with categories:
l Verify that the categories in the file you are importing exist in the Palm OS Desktop
software application. If they do not, records in those categories will be imported to
the Unfiled category.
l Click the Category selector in the View pane and select the All category.
3. From the File menu, choose Import.
4. In the Import dialog box, locate and select the file.
5. Click Import.
6. Click OK.
Importing vCal and vCard Files
To import information from a vCal or vCard file
1. Open the Palm OS Desktop software application.
2. Go to the Contacts window or Date Book window.
3. From the File menu, choose Import.
4. In the Import dialog box, locate and select the file.
5. Under File type, select vCal file (*.vcs) or vCard file (*.vcf).
6. Click Import.
7. For vCard files, select the category where you want to place the vCard.
8. Click Yes.
Tip: You can also import a vCal or vCard file by locating the file in My Computer or
Windows Explorer and double-clicking it, or dragging-and-dropping it onto the Desktop
window.
- 214 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Importing Information
You can import information from any of the supported file formats. Only Memo Pad can
import records larger than 64KB (approximately 13,000 words). Memos up to 64KB can
be imported, and are split into 4KB segments when the exceed 64KB. For example, if you
import a memo that is 68KB, you would get a 64KB memo and a 4KB memo.
To import information
1. Open the Palm OS Desktop software application into which you want to import
information.
2. If you are importing records with categories:
l Verify that the categories in the file you are importing exist. If they do not,
records in those categories will be imported into the Unfiled category.
l Click the Category selector in the View pane and select the All category.
3. From the File menu, choose Import.
4. In the Import dialog box, locate and select the file.
5. Click Import.
6. In the Specify Import Fields dialog box, match Palm OS Desktop software fields to
import data fields by dragging a Palm OS Desktop software field to an import data
field.
l To see other records in the file you are importing, click the right or left Scan
Records button.
l Field name order is saved in the Specify Import Fields dialog box. To revert to
the default order, click Reset.
Important: If you selected a category other than All before importing the file, you
will not see the Category check box. All records will be imported to the selected
category.
7.
8.
9.
If you import records that include category information, only available Palm OS
Desktop software application categories will be matched. Unmatched categories will
be imported to the Unfiled category.
To prevent a field of information from being imported, deselect the check box next to
the Desktop field that matches the field.
If the import file was exported from a DOS or Mac application, select the appropriate
character set from the Source file character set list.
Click OK to import the information.
- 215 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Importing Memo Text
To import a file as a single memo, select the text (*.txt) option in the Import dialog box.
Selecting comma delimited or tab delimited file formats breaks the text file into a separate
memo at each comma or tab character.
If you import or paste a text file larger than 64KB (approximately 13,000 words) as a
single memo into Memo Pad, it is automatically segmented into sequential memos. The
memo names are created by adding a numerical suffix to the first few words of text in the
imported file, so that they will be grouped together. For example, if you import a large text
file into Memo Pad that begins with the words Sales Data, the memos are named Sales
Data 1, Sales Data 2, and so on.
To import memo text
1. From the File menu, choose Import.
2. In the Import dialog box, locate and select the file.
3. Select the text (*.txt) file format.
4. Click Import.
Tip: To paste text files from the Clipboard, place your cursor in the View pane before
clicking the Paste button.
Paste Command
Purpose
Location
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard at the current selection. In
Contacts, Memo Pad, and To Do List, it positions the contents
based on the current sort order.
Edit menu
Paste button on the Desktop toolbar
Right-click menu in Contacts, Memo Pad, and To Do List
- 216 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Exporting Information
You can export information to various supported file formats.
When you export records from Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad, you can specify
whether to export all the records or only selected records.
Important Hidden private records are not exported.
To export information
1. Open the Palm OS Desktop software application from which to export information.
l To export only selected records, select the records to export.
2. From the File menu, choose Export.
3. In the Export As dialog box, type a name for the file in the File Name box.
Be sure to include the file type extension, such as .txt or .csv.
4. Click the Export Type selector and select a file format for the file.
5. Use the Folders and Drives selectors to choose a location for the file.
6. Select All or Currently Selected in the Range area.
7. Click Export.
If you are exporting to a file format other than archive, you can:
l Change the order in which fields are exported by dragging a field up or down in
the Specify Fields dialog box.
l Export only selected fields by selecting or deselecting the Field Name check
boxes. All selected field name check boxes will be exported.
8. Click OK.
Exporting vCal and vCard Files
To export information to a vCal or vCard file
1. Open the Palm OS Desktop software application.
2. Go to the Contacts window or Date Book window.
3. Select the record(s) you want to export.
4. From the File menu, choose Export vCal or Export vCard.
5. In the Export As dialog box, type a name for the file in the File Name box.
6. Use the Folders and Drives selectors to choose a location for the file.
7. Click Export.
Sending Information to Other Applications
To send information to another application
Note: Microsoft Office must be installed before you begin.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the Palm OS Desktop software application.
In Contacts, To Do List, or Memo Pad, select the record(s) you want to send.
From the Edit menu, choose Send To.
Select the application where you want to send the record(s).
- 217 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Customizing Palm OS Desktop Software
Setting Options
Setting General Options
You can choose options that configure Palm OS Desktop software as a whole in the
General tab of the Options dialog box.
To set General options
1. From the Tools menu, choose Options.
2. On the General tab of the Options dialog box, perform one or more of the following
actions:
l To select an application to display when you open Palm OS Desktop software,
click the Startup Application selector and select an application from the list.
l To change the directory where information is stored, click the Browse button,
select a new directory, and click OK.
You should not store your user data on removable media, such as floppy disks.
l To see a confirmation message before deleting or archiving records, select the
Confirm Before Deleting Records check box.
l To archive records instead of permanently deleting them, select the Archive
Deleted Records check box.
l To check if electronic business card (vCard) and electronic calendar event
(vCal) files are associated with Palm OS Desktop software, select the At
Startup Check to See If Palm OS Desktop Is the Default Handler check box.
3. Click OK.
Setting Security Options
You can prevent others from viewing your Palm OS Desktop software application
information by requiring a password.
To set Security options
1. From the Tools menu, choose Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, click the Security tab.
3. Select the Require Password to Access the Palm OS Desktop Data check box.
4. Click on the Unassigned button, and type in a password.
5. Click OK.
- 218 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting Date Book Options
You can choose options that configure the Date Book in the Date Book tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
To set Date Book options
1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog box, perform one or more of the following actions:
l To change the displayed time in Day view, click the Workday Begins selector
and select a time from the list.
l To change the day the week begins in Week, Month, and Year view, click the
Week Begins selector and select a day from the list.
l To set an alarm for all new events, select the Alarm Preset check box.
l Click the Time Interval selector and select from Minutes Before, Hours Before,
or Days Before.
l Click the Time measurement selector and select a number between 0 and 99.
3. Click OK.
User Accounts
Creating User Accounts
A HotSync user account associates a handheld with the corresponding data on a desktop
computer that it synchronizes with. The first time you perform a HotSync operation with a
given handheld, HotSync Manager prompts you to select an existing user account or to
create a new one. HotSync Manager then stores the user account name on the handheld.
For subsequent HotSync operations, HotSync Manager automatically gets the user
account name from the handheld and synchronizes its data with that of the associated
user account on the desktop computer.
Though HotSync Manager allows you to create a user account for a given handheld at
the start of the QDA-700’s first HotSync operation, you can use Palm OS Desktop to
create user accounts without performing a HotSync operation.
Note: Be sure to use a different user account name for each handheld you will
synchronize with the desktop computer.
To create a new user account with Palm OS Desktop
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the User selector on the Palm OS Desktop application toolbar.
Select Edit Users from the list.
In the Users dialog box, click New.
Type a unique name of up to 20 characters for the new user account.
Click OK.
- 219 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Selecting User Accounts
Separate data files are maintained for each user account you create. Only the information
for the currently selected user displays.
To select a user
l Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar and select a user account from the
list.
If you select a user account for which password security has been enabled, you must
enter the password to open the user files.
Renaming User Accounts
You can change a user name. If you rename a user account, the user name on the
associated handheld is changed the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
To rename a user
1. Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar and select Edit Users.
2. Select a user name in the Users dialog box.
3. Click the Rename button.
4. Type the new name in the name box.
User names must be unique and can contain up to 20 characters.
5. Click the OK button.
Deleting User Accounts
Important: Deleting a user name deletes all of the data associated with that user
account.
To delete a user
1. Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar and select Edit Users.
2. Select a user name in the Users dialog box.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. Click the OK button in the confirmation box.
- 220 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
User Profiles
Creating a User Profile
User profiles enable you to download data from the Palm OS Desktop application to a
handheld during the first HotSync operation, and not have it associated with a specific
user account name. This makes it possible to preconfigure a number of handhelds with
specific information (such as a company calendar) before you distribute them to users.
To create a user profile for the first-time HotSync operation
1. From the Tools menu in the Palm OS Desktop application, choose Users.
2. In the Users dialog box, click Profiles.
3. In the Profiles dialog box, click New.
4. In the New Profile dialog box, type a name for the new user profile.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Profile dialog box, click OK.
7. Create the user profile information on the Palm OS Desktop application by entering
or importing the information in the appropriate Palm OS Desktop application(s).
Selecting User Profiles
User profiles enable you to download data from Palm OS Desktop software to a handheld
and not have it associated with a specific user. Separate data files are maintained for
each user profile you create. Only the information for the currently selected user profile
displays.
To select another profile
1. Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar.
2. Select a user profile from the list.
User profiles are identified by the word "profile" in parentheses.
Renaming User Profiles
User profiles enable you to download data from Palm OS Desktop software to a handheld
and not have it associated with a specific user. This makes it possible to preconfigure a
number of handhelds with specific information (such as a company calendar) before you
distribute them to users.
To rename a user profile
1. Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar and select Edit Users.
2. Click the Profiles button in the Users dialog box.
3. Select a user profile name in the Profiles dialog box.
4. Click the Rename button.
5. Type the new name in the name box. Profile names must be unique and can contain
up to 20 characters.
6. Click the OK button.
- 221 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Deleting User Profiles
User profiles enable you to download data from Palm OS Desktop software to a handheld
and not have it associated with a specific user. This makes it possible to preconfigure a
number of handhelds with specific information (such as a company calendar) before you
distribute them to users.
Important: Deleting a user profile deletes all of the data associated with that user profile.
To delete a user profile
1. Click the User selector on the Desktop toolbar and select Edit User.
2. Click the Profiles button in the Users dialog box.
3. Select a user profile name in the Profiles dialog bo x.
4. Click the Delete button.
5. Click the OK button in the confirmation box.
HotSync Manager
HotSync Operation Overview
A HotSync operation is a two-way synchronization of records between your QDA-700 and
your computer. Changes that you make on your handheld or your computer are updated
on both platforms after a HotSync operation. A HotSync operation backs up all your data
and synchronizes only the changed portions of data, reducing the time it takes to
complete a HotSync operation. You can also install applications and data from your
computer to your handheld or to a Palm OS compatible expansion card during a HotSync
operation.
To perform a HotSync operation, HotSync Manager must be running. HotSync Manager
is an independent application that oversees the HotSync operation. HotSync Manager
monitors your computer's serial port, USB port, IR (infrared) port, network connection, or
all of these, and listens for a HotSync command from your handheld.
A HotSync operation can be performed even when the Palm OS Desktop application is
not running. But while a HotSync operation is in progress, you cannot use the Palm OS
Desktop if the current user is the same as the one performing the HotSync operation.
You can perform a HotSync operation through five different types of connections,
depending on the capabilities of your handheld and your computer. You can enable or
disable each of these types of connection from the HotSync Manager menu on your
computer. Click on the HotSync icon in the Windows taskbar.
Local USB
Uses a USB port on your desktop computer. Your handheld can
connect to a USB port by any method usually with a USB
cradle or cable that came with your handheld. Perform a local
USB HotSync operation when you are sitting at your computer.
You can use a local USB connection for the first HotSync
operation.
Local
Uses a serial port on your desktop computer. Your handheld
can connect to a serial port by any method usually with a serial
cradle or cable that came with your handheld. If your computer
and your handheld both have Bluetooth wireless technology,
then you can use it to make a local connection also. If your
- 222 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
computer is running Windows 98SE or Windows ME and you
have an infrared port or device on your computer, enable the
Local connection type and specify the serial port that your
infrared port is mapped to. This allows you to perform IR
HotSync operations by using the infrared port as a virtual serial
port. Perform a local HotSync operation when you are sitting at
your computer. You can use a local connection for the first
HotSync operation.
Modem
Uses two modems: one built-in in your QDA-700, the other to
your computer. HotSync Manager supports this type of
connection only with Palm OS Garnet or earlier handhelds.
InfraRed
Uses infrared communication between the IR port on your
handheld and an IR device or port on your computer. If your
computer is running Windows 2000 or Windows XP, then
enable this type of connection to perform IR HotSync
operations. You can use an infrared connection for the first
HotSync operation.
Network
Uses any method by which your handheld connects directly to
a network? or example, Bluetooth or WiFi (802.11) technology
to connect to a network access point, a handheld modem to
dial into a network, or a special Ethernet cradle/cable. Your
desktop computer must also be accessible on the network. You
can use a network HotSync operation when you are away from
your computer.
Changing HotSync Manager Startup Options
HotSync Manager must be running on your computer to perform a HotSync operation. By
default, HotSync Manager starts automatically when you start your computer.
To choose how to start HotSync Manager
1. Choose Setup from the HotSync Manager menu.
2. Select a startup option from the General tab of the Setup dialog box.
Always available
HotSync Manager launches when you start your computer.
Available only when the Palm OS Desktop is running
HotSync Manager launches when you start the Palm OS Desktop application.
Manual
HotSync Manager launches only when you select it from the Windows Start button
Programs menu.
3. Click OK.
Viewing the HotSync Log
Use the HotSync log to view information about a user’s last few HotSync operations. If a
HotSync operation does not complete successfully, then the user’s HotSync log provides
information about the error.
- 223 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To view a user’s HotSync log
1. Click the HotSync icon in the Windows taskbar
2. Click View Log and then select the account name of the user whose log you want to
view. If the user account name that you want is not listed, click More. When the
Select HotSync User to View Log dialog box appears, choose the user account
name you want and click OK.
The user’s HotSync log appears in a separate window.
Install Tool Overview
Your handheld comes with applications already installed, but with Install Tool you can add
even more, like games, dictionaries, travel guides, and maps. You can also install other
kinds of files, like photos, audio and video files, and documents. Applications and files are
easy to install by adding them to Install Tool and then performing a HotSync operation.
You can find applications that make the most of your Palm Powered handheld from the
thousands available at www.palmsource.com/software.
With Install Tool, you can install applications or files on your handheld or on a Palm OS
compatible expansion card that plugs into your handheld. The files you can install depend
on the file type as described below:
Standard Palm OS file types
Examples are Palm OS applications
(PRC) and databases (PDB, SDB, SSD).
File types registered by handheld Applications on your handheld register for
applications
the desktop files types that they can read.
Other applications may register for other
file types or example, a photo viewer for
JPG files, a media player for MP3 files,
and so on.
Note: If no handheld application is
registered for a particular file type, then
you cannot install files of that type. If the
file failed to install on the handheld, an
error message is written to your handhel’s
HotSync log. If the file failed to install on
an expansion card, then an error message
is written to the HotSync log on your
desktop computer.
On your QDA-700, Install Tool can install
only certain standard Palm OS file types.
You can install these same standard file
types on a card; you can install additional
file types on a card, but only if an
application on your handheld is registered
to
handle
them.
Refer
to
the
documentation that comes with the
application to see what types of files on an
expansion card that it enables you to use.
- 224 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Applications or files that you install on your handheld are different from the applications
that come pre-installed on your handheld. Applications, files, and information you store on
your handheld reside in RAM (random access memory). If you hard-reset your handheld,
the applications you have installed will be deleted. Applications or files that you install on
an expansion card are stored there until you remove them; these files are not deleted if
you hard-reset your handheld.
Installing Applications or Files
Use Install Tool to select applications or files to install during the next HotSync operation.
Notes
l Before installing applications or files on a Palm OS compatible expansion card, you
must register each card with HotSync Manager. To register an expansion card,
connect the card to your handheld and perform a HotSync operation. Once each
card is registered, yo u do not need to repeat this process prior to installing additional
items.
l If no handheld application is registered for a particular file type, then you cannot
install files of that type.
To use Install Tool
Open the Install Tool dialog box using one of the following methods:
l Click the Install button on the Palm OS Desktop application’s Launch Bar.
l Click the Start button, highlight Programs, highlight Palm OS Desktop, and select
Install Tool.
To select applications or files to install
1. In the Install Tool dialog box, click the User selector and select the correct user from
the list.
2. Click Add.
3. In the Open dialog box, select the item(s) to install.
4. Click OK.
5. When the Install Tool dialog box reappears, check the location in the Destination
column.
6. If necessary, change the destination by clicking Change Destination, indicating
where you want to install the items in the Change Destination dialog box, and then
clicking OK.
Tips:
l Click the Install To selectors to choose the destination for the items in the list
below that selector.
l To move an item from one list to the other, click the item and then click the
arrow pointing to the other list.
7. Click Done.
To remove applications or files from the Install list
1. Click the item(s) in the Install list.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Done.
- 225 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Removing Applications or Files Installed on a Handheld
You can remove applications or files that you have installed on your handheld, but you do
not use Install Tool to do it. Instead you remove them using your handheld.
To remove an application that you installed on your handheld or on an expansion
card
1. Turn on your QDA-700 and go to the Launcher II.
2. Tap the category icon which the application belongs to.
3. Tap and hold on the application icon for 2 seconds to pop-up the mini menu. Choose
Delete.
4. When the handheld asks whether you want to delete the application, tap Yes.
Note: The application is removed from your handheld along with any information
that you created using the application.
Tip: To delete files that you installed on your handheld or on an expansion card, you must
use the application that uses files of that type.
Troubleshooting Install Tool Problems
Why do files remain in the Install list after a HotSync operation?
Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation did not install on the
handheld. HotSync Manager on your desktop computer adds a message to the HotSync
log that explains the problem. If this happens, here are some likely reasons:
l Your handheld ran out of memory. Review the HotSync log for more information.
l The file type was not recognized by your handheld. This can happen when your
handheld has an expansion slot and therefore can support applications that use file
types other than Palm OS application files. However, your handheld cannot
recognize another file type until you start the application that uses such a file type at
least once. On your handheld, start the application that uses the file type, and then
repeat the steps to install the files.
Why are files removed from the Install list after a HotSync operation but are not
installed on my handheld?
Files whose destination is set to Handheld cannot be installed on the handheld if no
application is registered to accept files of that type. If this happens, a message is written
to the HotSync log on your handheld that confirms which files could not be installed. To
correct this problem, try the following:
l Be sure that you have an application on your handheld that can read the type of file
you want to install. See the documentation that came with your handheld or that
came with the application you want to use.
l Check that the type of the file is what you expect. The filename extension indicates
the type of file, but it might not be exactly what a handheld application can accept.
For example, if the handheld application that you want to use can read only JPG
files, but your file is named photo.JPEG, then change the filename to photo.JPG. Try
installing the renamed file.
- 226 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Why do some files that I install on my handheld not get backed up?
Files of types other than the standard Palm OS file types do not get backed up during the
same HotSync operation in which you install them on your handheld. After they are
successfully installed, the data in them is backed up or synchronized during the next
HotSync operation. Files that you install on an expansion card are not backed up.
What types of files can I install on my handheld?
On your QDA-700, you can install these standard Palm OS file types:
l PRC - applications
l PDB - databases
l
l
l
PQA - query applications (web clippings)
SCP - network scripts
PNC - network configuration
Install Tool does not allow you to install files of other types on your QDA-700. However,
you can install files of these and other types on an expansion card in such a handheld,
but only if an application on the handheld can read them.
Extensions Overview
Palm OS Desktop Extensions are applications that you install individually and use within
the Palm OS Desktop window. They add new functionality to the Palm OS Desktop
software.
You can obtain Extensions from Licensees or third-party software vendors. Each
Extension comes with an installer that assists you with installing the Extension. After you
complete the installation and start Palm OS Desktop software, the Extension's button
appears on the Launch bar. Click the button on the Launch bar to start the Extension
within the Palm OS Desktop software. Because an Extension runs within Palm OS
Desktop software, check the menu commands or toolbar icons that have been added for
the Extension.
If you want to see which Extensions are installed, you need to check the Other tab of the
About Palm OS Desktop Dialog box. See Checking Which Extensions Are Installed for
more information. The Other tab also lists any Addins. See the Addins Overview for more
information.
Checking Which Extensions Are Installed
To check which Extensions are installed
1. From the Help menu, choose About Palm OS Desktop.
2. Click the Version button.
3. Click the Other tab. See About Palm Desktop Dialog Box for more information.
Addins Overview
Palm OS Desktop Addins are special programs that add new functionality to one or more
of your Palm OS Desktop software applications. An Addin adds functionality to an existing
Palm OS Desktop software application.
Addins are available from Palm Powered Licensees and third-party software vendors.
Tip: To determine which Addins are running, see Checking Which Addins Are Running.
- 227 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Checking Which Addins Are Running
To check which Addins are running
1. From the Help menu, choose About Palm OS Desktop.
2. Click the Version button.
3. Click the Other tab. See About Palm Desktop Dialog Box for more information.
Troubleshooting
If you cannot start Palm OS Desktop software or it freezes
1.
Verify that the installation completed.
If the installation procedure was interrupted, reinstall the software.
2. Verify that your PC meets the following system requirements:
l Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP
l Pentium or higher processor
l VGA or higher monitor
3. If you selected to store a user data directory on a removable drive (such as a floppy
disk drive or zip drive), verify the disk is in the drive.
Important: It is recommended that data directories be created on non-removable drives.
If Contacts records display incorrectly in the icon and business card views
In some cases, the Contacts displays a name that is not in the dialog box option. For
example:
If you select the "Last Name, First Name" option but a record has only a Company name,
the Contacts displays the Company name for the record.
However, if the record has a First Name and a Company name but no Last Name, only
the First Name displays.
If you select the "Company, Last Name" option but a record has only a Company name
and a First Name, the Contacts displays those names.
If a category is automatically deleted
It is possible to over-allocate categories if you add categories on both your handheld and
Palm OS Desktop software. This can cause categories to be discarded during a HotSync
operation. In such a case, the records in the removed category will be moved to Unfiled.
See Fixing Corrupt Records for more information about corrupted categories.
If data appears to be missing or truncated on your handheld
Some handhelds do not support all of the features of this Palm OS Desktop. This includes
a character limit for certain fields where you enter data. Information may appear to be
missing or truncated on your handheld. But all of the data will remain intact on the
Desktop, unless you edit the data on the handheld and perform a HotSync operation. For
more information, see Classic Palm OS Desktop Users.
- 228 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8. Organizer
This section introduces some applications, which allow you schedule your daily tasks and
appointment
l
l
l
l
Date Book
Memo Pad
To Do List
Calculator
- 229 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.1 Using the Date Book
The Date Book lets you quickly and easily schedule appointments or any activity
associated with a date or date and time. When you open the Date Book, the current date
and a list of times for a standard business day are displayed.
Opening the Date Book
Tap the Organizer category in Launcher II and select Date book icon to open the Date
Book to today’s schedule. The date is displayed at the top left of the screen.
Scheduling Events
An entry in the Date Book is called an event. When you schedule an event, its description
appears on the time line and its duration is set to 1 hour by default. You can easily change
the start time and duration for any event. You can schedule:
l Timed events, such as meetings, that have a specific date and a specific start
and end time.
l Untimed events, such as birthdays, holidays and anniversaries. These events
occur on a particular date but have no specific start or end times; they appear at
the top of the list of times marked with a diamond. You can schedule more than
one untimed event on the same date.
l Repeating events, such as a weekly meeting that is held on the same day at
the same time each week.
l Continuous events, such as a vacation or three-day conference.
l All day events, which reflect the default length of the day as set by the user.
Scheduling Timed Events
You can schedule timed events for the current date or for future dates.
To schedule a timed event for the current date
1. Tap the Date Book icon in the Applications Launcher to open the Date Book. The
current date and a list of times for a normal business day are displayed in Day view.
2. Tap the line next to the time that corresponds to the start of the event with the current
day selected.
Tap a line next to
desired time then
enter text
Time bar
shows default
duration
3.
Enter a description of the event, up to 255 characters in length.
- 230 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.
Set the event’s duration:
- If the event is 1-hour long, skip to the end of this procedure.
- If the event is longer or shorter than an hour, tap directly on the time to open
the Set Time dialog.
Tap the time to
display the Set
Time dialog
5.
You can open the Set Time dialog (to select a start time) by making sure no event is
selected and then writing a number on the number side of the text input area.
To set the duration of the event, do one of the following
1. Tap the time columns in the Set Time dialog to set the Start Time; Tap End Time;
then tap the time columns to set the End Time.
2. Tap All Day if the event lasts all day.
3. The default hours of a standard business day are set by the user and may be
changed using the Preferences command in the Date Book
Tap to scroll to earlier
Start time
Tap to change hours
Tap to change
minutes
Tap to scroll to later
4.
Tap OK.
- 231 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Scheduling a Timed Event for Another Date
To schedule a timed event, do one of the following ways
l Tap the desired day of the week in the date bar at the top of the screen. If necessary,
tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to another week.
l Tap Go To at the bottom of the screen to open the Go to Date dialog. Select a date
by tapping a year, month and day in the calendar.
After locating the desired date, follow the steps for scheduling an event for the current
day.
Scheduling Untimed Events
You can schedule untimed events for any date. Untimed events appear at the top of the
list of times marked with a diamond.
To schedule an untimed event
1. Select the event date you want,
2. Tap New.
3. Tap No Time in the Set Time dialog.
You can tap OK instead of No Time, but make sure nothing is entered for start or
end time.
You can create a new untimed event by making sure no event is selected and then
writing letters in the text input area. When you start writing, the untimed event
appears at the top of the screen.
4.
Enter a description of the event.
- 232 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
New untimed
event
5.
Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event.
If you create a timed event and later want to make it an untimed event, tap directly on the
event time on the Date Book screen; then tap No Time and tap OK.
Scheduling Repeating or Continuous Events
The Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular intervals or extend
over a period of consecutive days. Repeating events include a birthday and a weekly
guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time of day.
Continuous events might include a business trip or a vacation.
To schedule a repeating or continuous event
1. Tap the event (Be sure to tap the event and not the time next to the event.).
Typically, a continuous event is an untimed event.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog.
Tap the
repeat
box
- 233 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often the event repeats. For a continuous
event, tap Day.
Enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to repeat on the
Every line.
For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event repeats every
other month.
Tap the End on pick list and tap Choose Date to set an end date for the repeating or
continuous event. Use the date picker to select an end date.
Tap OK twice. An icon that represents a repeating event appears to the far right on
the event line.
Changing Repeating or Continuous Events
When changes are made to a repeating or continuous event you have the option of
applying the change to just the current event, the current event and all future occurrences
of this event, or all occurrences of this event - past, present and future.
To change repeating or continuous event
1. Select the event you want to delete.
2. Tap Details. The Event Details dialog opens.
3. Tap Delete. The Repeating Event dialog opens asking for confirmation of the delete.
4. You can also select Delete Event from the Record menu. This opens the Repeating
Event dialog.
Tap
Delete
5.
Select one of the following options:
Current deletes a single occurrence of this event
Future
deletes the current event and all future occurrences of this event
All
deletes all past, current and future occurrences of this event.
The event is removed from your date book and you are returned to the day view where
you started. These steps apply to all changes you make to repeating or continuous
events.
- 234 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Scheduling Repeating or Continuous Event Tips
Keep the following in mind when scheduling repeating or continuous events:
l If you change the start date of a repeating event, your QDA-700 calculates the
number of days you moved the event. Your QDA-700 then automatically changes
the end date to maintain the duration of the repeating event.
l If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past
occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) are not changed and
your QDA-700 creates a new repeating event.
l If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from January 14
to January 15) and apply the change to all occurrences, the new date becomes the
start date of the repeating event. Your QDA-700 adjusts the end date to maintain the
duration of the event.
l If you change other repeat settings (for example, time, alarm, private) of a repeating
event and apply the change to all occurrences, your QDA-700 creates a new event.
The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is changed. Past
occurrences (prior to the day of the change) are not changed.
l If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that
occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon.
Rescheduling Events
You reschedule events using the Details option in the Date Book. You can also use the
Details option to convert untimed events into timed events.
To reschedule an event
1. Tap the event you want to reschedule.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap the Time box, select a new time and then tap OK to change the time.
4. Tap the Date box, select a new date and then tap OK to change the date.
Setting the Alarm
The Alarm setting lets you set an audible alarm for events in your Date Book and display
a reminder message onscreen. For untimed events, only the reminder message appears.
When you enable the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings, your QDA-700 vibrates
and the indicator light blinks to notify you. This is useful when you want to turn the Alarm
Sound off but still be notified by alarms.
Setting an Alarm for an Event
You can set an alarm for minutes, hours, or days before an event. When you set an alarm,
an Alarm icon appears to the far right of the event with the alarm.
You can also set a silent alarm for untimed events that displays a reminder message on
the screen prior to the event. The alarm is triggered for the specified period of minutes,
hours, or days before midnight of the day on which the untimed event begins.
For example, you set a 5-minute alarm for an untimed event that occurs on February 4.
The reminder message will appear at 11:55 p.m. on the night of February 3. The r eminder
remains onscreen until you turn on your QDA-700 and tap OK to turn off the reminder.
- 235 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tap the event to which you want to assign an alarm.
Tap Details.
Tap the Alarm check box to select it.
The default setting, 5 Minutes, appears.
Set the alarm time:
Select the 5 next to the Alarm check box and enter any number from 0 to 99
(inclusive) as the number of time units.
Tap the pick list to change the time unit; select Minutes, Hours, or Days
Enter number of time units
Tap here to select unit of time
8.
9.
Tap OK.
Tap the Snooze option to dismiss the alarm for a 5-minute period, once an alarm
has gone off.
To dismiss the alarm using the snooze option
Tap Snooze to delay the alarm for a preset five-minute period when the alarm dialog
appears. Each time you tap Snooze, the alarm is dismissed for an additional 5-minute
period.
- 236 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting Alarm Options
You can set the alarm to go off automatically for each new event using preferences. You
can also set a tone for the alarm and the number of times the alarm sounds.
To set alarm options
1. Tap the Menu icon in the Date Book to open the Preferences dialog:
2. Tap Preferences in the Options menu.
3.
4.
Select from the following options:
l Tap Alarm Preset to set an alarm for each new event automatically. The
silent alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours before
midnight of the date of the event.
l Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and then tap an option to set the tone of the
alarm. Options include Alarm, Alert, Bird, Concert, Phone, Sci-fi and Wake
Up.
l Tap Remind Me to define how many times the alarm sounds—once or twice;
or three, five, or ten times.
l Tap Play Every to set how often the alarm sounds—every minute; or every 5,
10, or 30 minutes.
Tap OK.
- 237 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Changing the Date Book View
The Date Book includes four views for displaying your appointments: day view, week view,
month view and agenda view.
To display the Date Book views
Tap a view icon in the lower-left area of the Date Book screen.
Date book view
To display the current time
Tap and hold down the stylus on the date in the date bar to display the time. (When you
release the stylus, the menu bar appears.)
Working in Week View
Week view displays a calendar of your events for an entire week. This view lets you
quickly review your appointments and available time slots. In addition, the graphical
display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.
Displaying the Week View
1. Tap the Week view icon or press the Date Book button until the Week view appears.
Week view
2. Tap the left and right navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a
time, or tap on a specific day to display the details of an event.
Note: The Week View also shows untimed events and events before and after the
range of times displayed.
- 238 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Previous
Next week
Dot indictedes
untimed event
Bar indicates earlier
Bar indicates
later event
3.
Tap an event to display a description of the event at the top of the screen.
Event
Tap to show event
Tips for Using Week View
Keep the following points in mind when using Week view:
l Tap and drag the event to a different time or day to reschedule an event while in
Week view.
l Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time selected for a
new event.
l Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week view to move directly to that
day without selecting an event.
l The Week view displays the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in the
Date Book Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time span,
a bar appears at the top or bottom of that day's column. Use the onscreen scroll
arrows to scroll to the event.
- 239 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Spotting event conflicts
With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it is possible to
schedule events that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).
An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week view as overlapping time bars and in
the Day view as overlapping brackets to the left of the conflicting times.
Event
conflicts
Working in Month View
The Month View screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines in the
Month view indicate events, repeating events and untimed events.
You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month View. See “Changing the
Date Book Display” for more information.
Previous / next
Dashed line
indicates continuous
event
Dots below date
indicate untimed
events
Month view button
- 240 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tips for Using Month View
Keep the following points in mind when using the Month view:
l Tap a day in the Month view to display that day in the Day view.
l Tap the scroll arrows in the upper right corner to move forward or backward a month.
l Tap Go To in order to open the date selector and select a different month.
l Use the scroll buttons on the front panel of your QDA-700 to move between months.
Press the top button to display the previous month, the bottom button to display the
next month.
Working in Agenda View
The Agenda view lets you view appointments, untimed events and To Do List items in a
single screen. Although it is primarily a viewing option, you can also use the Agenda view
to check off completed To Do List items. To go to a Day View of any event on the Agenda
view screen, simply tap the desired event.
Displaying the Agenda View
1. Tap the Agenda view icon or press the Date Book button until the Agenda view
appears.
Agenda view
2. Use the navigation bars to move forward or backward a day at a time or to display
more To Do items.
Scroll the list
for each view
Tips for Using Agenda View
l Tap any appointment while in Agenda view to display the Day View of the
appointment.
l Check off completed To Do List items in the Agenda view, or click a description of an
item to go directly into the To Do List application.
l You can change the category of To Do items shown. Tap on the pick list and select
the new category.
- 241 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Changing the Date Book Display
In Day or Month view, you can change which events appear in the Date Book. In Day view,
you can display time bars that highlight event conflicts.
To change the Date Book display of events
1. Tap the Menu icon in Day view or Month view.
2. Tap Options and then tap Display Options.
3. Select from the following options for Day View:
l Tap Show Time Bars to display time bars showing the duration of an event and
any event conflicts.
l Tap Compress Day View to display start and end times for each event, but no
blank time slots at the bottom of the screen, to minimize scrolling. Clear the
option to display all time slots.
4. Select whether to display Show Timed Events, Show Untimed Events, or Show
Daily Repeating Events for Month view,.
5. Tap OK.
- 242 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Changing the Displayed Start and End Times
You can change the preferences used for new entries. Preferences include the display
starting time, display ending time and alarm characteristics. See the section “Setting
Alarm Options” earlier in this chapter for more information on alarm preferences.
To change the start and end time in the Date Book
1. Tap the Menu icon in the Date Book.
2. Tap Option and then tap Preferences.
3. The Start and End time are used by various screens in the Date Book. The Day view
schedules events to start and end at these times when the All Day option is selected.
The Week view displays the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time.
4. Tap Start Time and use the scroll arrows to select a new start time for the Date Book
screens. Repeat the step to set a new end time. If the time slots you select do not fit
on one screen, you can tap the scroll arrows to scroll up and down.
5. Tap OK.
- 243 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.2 Using Memo Pad
The Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with records in the
Date Book, Address Book, or To Do List.
Opening the Memo Pad
Tap the Organizer category in Launcher II and choose Memo Pad icon. The Memo Pad
opens to display the last Memo Pad screen that you viewed.
Creating Memos
A record in the Memo Pad is called a memo. A memo can contain up to 4,000 characters.
The number of memos you can store is limited only by the memory available on your
(device type, lower case).
1. Open the Memo Pad application.
2. Tap New in Memo List view
Tap New
Tip: You can also create a new memo by beginning to write in the text input area in
the Memo List screen. The first letter is automatically capitalized and begins your
new memo.
3. Enter the text you want to appear in the memo. Use the carriage return stroke to
move down to new lines in the memo.
4. Tap Done.
- 244 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Reviewing Memos
The Memo List displays the first line of a memo. This makes it easy to locate and review
your memos. You can easily sort memos in the Memo List or move through memos using
Memo options.
1. Tap the text of the memo in the Memo List.
2. Review or edit the text in the memo.
Tap a memo
to review its
contents
3. Tap Done.
Moving through a Memo You are Reviewing
1. Tap the text of the memo you want to review in the Memo List.
2. Tap the Menu icon and choose Options.
3. Tap one of the following options to go to the beginning or end of the memo:
4. Tap Go to Top of Page to move to the top (first) line of the memo.
5. Tap Go to Bottom of Page to move to the bottom (last) line of the memo.
Changing the Order in which Memos Appear in the Memo List
1. In Memo Pad, tap menu and choose Preferences in Options menu.
2. Choose one of the following options:
3. Tap Manual to sort new memos in the sequence in which you create them.
4. Tap Alphabetical to sort new and existing memos in numerical and then alphabetical
sequence.
5. Tap OK.
- 245 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.3 Using To Do List
The To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things that you
have to do.
Opening the To Do List
Tab the Organizer category in Launcher II and select To Do List icon. To Do List opens
to display the category of items you last viewed.
Creating To Do List Items
A To Do List item is a reminder of a task that you have to complete. A record in the To Do
List is called an item.
To create a To Do List item
1. Open To Do List.
2. Tap New .
New To Do
item
Tap New
3. Enter the text of the To Do List item. You can enter text that is longer than one line.
By using Phone Look option, you can add a name, address, and phone number to a
To Do List item.
4. Tap anywhere onscreen to deselect the To Do List item.
If no To Do List item is currently selected, writing in the text input area automatically
creates a new item.
- 246 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting To Do List Priorities
You can set priorities for tasks in your To Do List according to their importance or urgency.
Items appear by priority and due date at the top of the To Do List by default, with 1 the
highest priority. Changing an item’s priority may move its position in the list.
New items automatically have a priority of 1. If you select another item, before creating a
new item, the item you create appears beneath the selected item with the same priority
as the selected item.
1. Tap Show at the bottom of the list, tap Show Priorities if priorities aren’t visible in the
To Do List, and tap OK.
2. Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do List item.
Tap to select priority
3. You can change the Priority number that is displayed, with 1 the most important and 5
the least important.
Checking Off To Do List Items
A To Do List item can be checked off to indicate that it is completed.
1. Tap Show, then tap Show Completed Items in the To Do List. If you clear this setting,
your To Do items disappear from the list when you complete (check) them. Items that
no longer appear on the list because Show Completed Items is turned off have not
been deleted. They are still in the memory of your (device type, lower case). You must
purge completed items to remove them from memory.
2. Tap the check box on the left side of the item
Completed To Do List
- 247 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Changing Priorities and Due Dates
You can change the To Do List to display the due date assigned to an item, change its
priority, and assign a category to the task with the To Do Item Details dialog.
You can then sort To Do List items by priority, due date, or category.
1. Tap the item that you want to change in the To Do List.
2. Tap Details.
3. Tap No Date to open the Due Date pick list in the Details dialog.
Tap here
4. Tap the date that you want to assign the item. Options are Today, Tomorrow, One
Week from the current date, No Date to remove the due date from the item, or
Choose Date to display the date selector and select a date. tomorrow’s date.
5. Tap Private to hide this item when Security is turned on.
For more information, see “Making records private” in Chapter X, Performing
Common Tasks.
6. Tap OK.
If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Preferences dialog, you can tap
directly on the due date in the To Do List to open the pick list shown in step 2.
Sorting To Do Items
1. Tap Show in the To Do List.
2. Tap Sort By in the To Do Preferences dialog, and then select an option from the pick
list:
3. Tap Priority, Due Date to sort items by priority first, and then due date. Tap Due Date,
Priority to reverse that order.
4. Tap Category, Priority to sort items by category first, and then priority. Tap Priority,
Category to reverse that order.
5. Tap OK.
- 248 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Displaying Completed and Due Items
You can have the To Do List display completed items and their completion dates, as well
as due items and their due dates.
1. Tap Show in the To Do List.
2. Choose from the following settings in the To Do Preferences dialog:
l Tap Show Completed Items to display your completed items in the To Do List.
If this setting is turned off, completed To Do items disappear from the list, but
are kept in the memory of your QDA-700. You must purge completed items to
remove them from memory.
l Tap Show Only Due Items to show only the items that are currently due, past
due, or have no due date specified. When this setting is active, items that are
not yet due do not appear in the list until their due date.
l Tap Record Completion Date to replace the due date with the actual date
when you complete (check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to an item,
the completion date still records when you complete the item.
l Tap Show Due Dates to display the due dates for items in the To Do List and to
display an exclamation mark next to items that remain incomplete after the due
date passes.
3. Tap OK.
- 249 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
8.4 Using Calculator
Calculator enables you to perform basic calculations. Use Calculator to do the following:
l Perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root operations.
l Store and retrieve values.
l Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming a series of
“chain” calculations.
To open Calculator:
1. Tap Organizer category in the Launcher II
2. Tap Calc icon.
Performing calculations
The Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations.
Clears the calculation so that you can begin a new calculation.
Clears the last entered number. If you make a mistake while entering a
number in the middle of a calculation, you can use this button to reenter
the number without starting the calculation over.
Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value. If you
want to enter a negative number, enter the number first and then press the
+/– button.
Places the current number into memory. Each new number you enter with
the M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. The number
that you add can be either a calculated value or any number you enter by
- 250 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
pressing the number buttons. Pressing this button has no effect on the
current calculation (or series of calculations); it merely places the value
into memory until it is recalled.
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it in the current
calculation.
Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory.
Calculates the square root of a number. Enter the number, and then tap
the square root button.
Viewing Recent Calculations
The Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of calculations
and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain” calculations.
To display recent calculations:
1. Tap the Menu icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Recent Calculations.
3. After you finish reviewing the calculations, tap OK.
- 251 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
9. Documents Viewer
QDA-700 allows you to read Word and Excel files, as well as eBooks with
l
l
Documents to Go
PalmReader
- 252 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
9.1 Using Documents to Go Viewer
Documents to Go Viewer allows you to use Word and Excel files, including support for
their native file formats, on your QDA-700 anywhere, anytime.
Note: The Documents to Go Viewer in your QDA-700 is a view only version. To edit &
save your files and attachments, plus create new files, synchronize files, etc, please
browse www.dataviz.com and check for Documents to Go Premium Edition.
Documents to Go Viewer cannot be used unless it is selected for installation during the
first run of your QDA-700 (see 1.4 First Run for details), or it is installed in a later time.
To install Documents to Go Viewer after the first run:
1. Tap Documents category in Launcher II
2. Select DocsToGo icon to install the application. The Home of Launcher II appears
again after the installation is completed.
To open Documents to Go Viewer (the first time):
1. Tap All category in Launcher II
2. Select Document icon
3. Tap I Accept to accept the license agreement of the Documents to Go Viewer. You
may tap the up and down arrow (or use the 5-way navigator) to view the whole
license agreement.
4.
Tap Update Now to update the application
- 253 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
The Documents to Go Viewer searches your QDA-700 for any Word or Excel files
automatically. If the files are found, it will be displayed in the file list. You may disable this
automatic search in Preference afterwards.
To open Documents to Go Viewer in a later time:
1. Tap Main category in Launcher II
2. Select Document icon.
The Documents to Go Viewer searches your QDA-700 for any Word or Excel files
automatically. If the files are found, it will be displayed in the file list. You may disable
this automatic search in Preference afterwards.
List View
In the list view of Documents to Go Viewer, it shows the followings:
- 254 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Type
Name
Documents to Go Viewer is capable of displaying the native files of
both Word and Excel. The icon represents the corresponding file
type or format. Tapping on a specific icon will display a pop-up menu
with the following options:
l Details: Rename or display details about the file, such as
location and category
l Move To Card (or Move To Handheld)
l Beam: Beams the file via infrared to another device
l Send: Sends the files as an attachment (only appears on
supported devices).
l Delete: Deletes the file.
l
Display the name of the Word or Excel files.
Size
Display the size of the Word or Excel files.
HotSync
HotSync icon indicates that the file will be synchronized with the
desktop. The “dash” icon indicates that the file will NOT be
synchronized with the desktop.
Card
Indicate whether the file is located on an expansion card. If the card
icon is not displayed, the file is located on the QDA-700’s internal
memory.
Tapping on each column heading will sort the list of files. Tapping again will reverse the
sort order.
To display the file list by file type:
At the bottom of the screen, there is a Show pick list. You can select to show Microsoft
Word files or Microsoft Excel files, or All Formats at the same time.
You can also tap the category pick list at the top-right corner to open the specific
category.
To open an individual file
l Tap the file name of the file.
The following opening screen displays while Documents to Go Viewer is opening the file.
You may tap Cancel to abort the operation.
- 255 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
List View Menu
In List View, the following menu options are available:
In File Menu
Search for Files
Whenever you launch Documents to Go Viewer, it will search for
any Word or Excel files stored in the memory card and shows in
the List View. In some occasions, you may use the Search for
Files options to initiate a search manually.
Details
Displays the detail information (file name, storage location,
category, last modified date, file format, and file size) of the
selected file.
You may choose to delete the file from the memory card by
tapping the Delete* button in this Document Details screen. Or
you may beam the file to another Palm OS devices by tapping the
Beam* button in this screen.
Delete File*
Delete the selected file from the memory card.
Beam File*
Beam the selected file from the memory card to another Palm OS
device.
Send File*
Send the selected file as an attachment via email application.
Move to Handheld*
Transfer the selected file to the internal memory of your
QDA-700.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
- 256 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
In Options Menu
Display Options
Toggle the display of document size in List View.
Preferences
Sets the following preference:
n Include in global find -- When performing a
Global Find by tapping the Find soft button on the
screen, it is search all applications on your
QDA-700 for the specific string. Nevertheless, it
takes longer time to search through all of the
documents for each of the document types. If this
is unnecessary, uncheck this box.
n Always search for supported files when
opening Documents to Go -- toggle the
automatic file search when opening Documents
to Go.
n
Display the registration information
Registration Info
About Documents to Go
Display the version information and other related
information.
- 257 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Word View
Word view is the screen view when a Microsoft Word file is opened. The document is
displayed at the middle of the screen and available options are displayed at the top and at
the bottom of the screen.
*
Bold the selected text.
*
Turn the selected text into italic
*
Underline the selected text.
*
Set the paragraph alignment
*
Convert the selected paragraph into bullet list
*
Convert the selected paragraph into number list
*
Change the font size
*
Enlarge the first letter of the paragraph
Search for or replace specific string in the document. To specify the find or
replace, you can select Case Sensitive or Find Entire Words Only.
*
Use the bookmark function.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
- 258 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Word View Menu
In File Menu:
Save*
Save the current file
Save As*
Save the current file using a new file name
Preferences
Include in Global Find – Check to search all Word to Go
documents when using the Global Find feature on your
QDA-700. Uncheck to skip Word to Go documents and
speed up searches.
Enable Font Viewing – Checking this option will allow the
text in the document to be displayed using the installed Word
to Go fonts. Unchecking the option will display text using the
standard built-in fonts.
Hide “Edit Table” Controls – Checking this option will hide
the “Edit Table” controls. Unchecking this option will show
the “Edit Table” controls.
Enable Active Text Field – Checking this option will allow
many text entry utilities like word completers and spell
checkers to work. If you are having difficulty using an add-on
keyboard, you may want to uncheck this option to allow
keyboard drivers to function correctly.
Omit Graphics in Native File – Checking this open will hide
the graphics in the Word document. Unchecking this option
will show the graphics.
Save Mode :
Confirm Changes is the default setting and requires that
your acknowledge changes that have been made when
tapping done, and choose an action. Documents that are
open and edited will be skipped during synchronization.
Auto Save Changes is the setting to choose if you want
documents to act like MemoPad notes where changes are
saved as soon as you make them.
Word Count*
Shows the total number of word in the document
Check Spelling*
Check for any incorrectly spelt words.
Edit Custom Dictionary*
Edit the user dictionary
Zoom
Small – Displays text using smaller fonts allowing for the
maximum number of lines of text on the screen.
Medium – Displays text using medium fonts allowing for
more lines of text on the screen with greater readability.
Large – Displays text using larger fonts allowing for
maximum readability.
Displays the registration information
Registration Info
About Documents to Go
Displays the
information.
version
- 259 -
information
and
other
related
QDA-700 User’s Guide
In Insert Menu:
Page Break*
Insert a page break at the insertion point
Table*
Insert a table at the insertion point
Bookmark*
Insert a bookmark at the insertion point
Hyperlink*
Insert a hyperlink at the insertion point.
In Format Menu
Font*
Change the font size
Paragraph*
Change the paragraph alignment
Bullets & Numbering*
Convert the selected text to bullet list or number list.
Increase Indent*
Indent the selected paragraph
Decrease Indent*
decrease the indent of the selected paragraph.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
To exit Word View, tap Done.
- 260 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Sheet View
Sheet view is the screen view when a Microsoft Excel file is opened. The spreadsheet is
displayed at the middle of the screen and available options are displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
*
Insert a function
(the left most)
Move the cursor to the left by one column
Move the cursor to the left by one page
Move the cursor up by one row
Move the cursor down by one row
Move the cursor to the right by one page
(the right most)
Move the cursor to the right by one column
You can quickly jump to specific locations without having to
scroll:
Go To Cell: Allows you to specify a row and column to jump
to. Position your cursor in the text entry area and use graffiti
to enter the location (example: c25). Tap the Go button and
the specified cell will appear in the upper left corner of the
sheet display.
Comments*: Allows you to jump to predefined cells in the
spreadsheet using the desktop document’s built in Cell
Comments feature. Simply insert cell comments in the
original spreadsheet and the comment text will appear in the
Comments window. Tap the comment and the cell where
that comment exists will appear in the upper left corner of
the sheet display.
- 261 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
(next to text entry area) Displays and edits* the Cell Content Detail.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
Tapping on the pick list on the top-right corner of the screen toggle the selection of
different worksheets in the workbook.
Tapping on the Column Indicator (denoted by A, B, C, D….) and Row Indicator (denoted
by 1, 2,3,4, 5, …) displays the mini menu with the following options:
Freeze
Freezes the selected column/row from scrolling.
Fit (in column selection only)
Fits the column width with the content in the column.
Home
Returns to the home column/row.
Select
Select the specific column/row.
Insert*
Insert a column/row in front of / on top of the current
column/row
Delete*
Delete the column/row being selected.
Hide
Hide the currently selected column/row
Sort* (in column selection only)
Sort the content in the current column/row.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
Tapping on the V icon at the top-left corner displays a mini menu with the following
options:
Find
Find the specific string in the entire workbook or
current worksheet only.
Find Next
Find the next field with the specific string previously
entered.
Home
Returns to the home column/row.
Unhide All
Unhide all the columns/rows being hide.
Reset View
Reset the column width and row height to the default
value.
Format the worksheet.
Format Sheet*
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
- 262 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Sheet View Menu
In File Menu:
Save*
Save the current file
Save As*
Save the current file using a new file name
Recalculate*
Recalculate the values in the worksheet
Add Bookmark*
Add a bookmark based on the currently selected field.
Edit Bookmark*
Edit the bookmark(s) previously added.
Zoom
Select the font size on the screen.
Small – displays text using smaller fonts allowing for the
maximum number of lines of text on the screen.
Medium – displays text using medium fonts allowing for
more lines of text on the screen with greater readability.
Large – displays text using larger fonts allowing for
maximum readability.
Preferences
Include SheetToGo in Global Find – Check to search all
Sheet to Go documents when using the Global Find feature
on your QDA-700. Uncheck to skip Sheet to Go documents
and speed up searches.
Automatically Recalculate – Check to automatically
recalculate spreadsheets when changing a cell value that is
included in a formula.
Save Mode :
Confirm Changes is the default setting and requires that
your acknowledge changes that have been made when
tapping done, and choose an action. Documents that are
open and edited will be skipped during synchronization.
Auto Save Changes is the setting to choose if you want
documents to act like MemoPad notes where changes are
saved as soon as you make them.
Registration Info
Displays the registration information
About Sheet to Go
Displays the
information.
version
- 263 -
information
and
other
related
QDA-700 User’s Guide
In Insert Menu:
Function*
Insert a function for calculation.
Row *
Insert a row on top of the current row
Column*
Insert a column in front of the current column
Sheet*
Insert a new worksheet in the current file.
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
In Format Menu:
Cell*
Set the format of the cell.
Number*
Set the number of the cell
Sheet*
Set the format of the current worksheet
Sort*
Sort the column/row based on the content on the
column/row
Unhide All
Reveal all the columns/rows being hidden
Reset View Settings
Reset the column width and row height to the default value
* - not applicable in Documents to Go Viewer Edition. See the on-screen message for
more details.
- 264 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
9.2 Using PalmReader
PalmReader is an intuitive and powerful program for viewing electronic books (eBooks).
Unlike other eBook readers, the PalmReader shows text one page at a time as paper
books do. This provides for a much richer reading experience than with the typical "giant
scrolling document" approach that most other programs use.
In addition, the PalmReader supports embedded hyperlinks and images. These features
are explained in the Images and Links sections of this manual.
- 265 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Reading eBook
PalmReader is merely an eBook reader and you can add your new eBook to your
QDA-700 to read anytime and anywhere.
To add eBook(s) to QDA-700
1. Launch the Palm Desktop software. On the left-hand side of the application window
you will see "Install." Click on "Install."
2. Click on "Add."
3. Browse to eBook file (.pdb) and select by double-click on it.
4. Repear steps 2-3 until you have added all the eBooks.
5. Click "Done." Then click OK.
6. HotSync your QDA-700 as you normally do.
View eBook(s) in QDA-700
After the eBook is installed to your QDA-700, you can use the PalmReader to open and
view your favourite eBook.
To view eBook
1. Tap Documents category in the Launcher II and select PalmReader icon. It will
prompt you to open a book.
2. Select the eBook you wish to open
Some ebook may require unlocking before you can read it. Check with your eBook
supplier for more details.
- 266 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Turn pages in PalmReader
There are several ways to turn pages in the PalmReader:
Method
Tap the screen
Details
Tapping the bottom half of the screen will display the next
page; tapping the top half of the screen displays the previous
page. You may change the setting so that changing pages is
done by tapping the left and right halfs of the screen.
Push the 5-way navigator Pushing UP displays the previous page and pushing DOWN
up and down
displays the next page.
Use the progress bar
The progress bar at the bottom-right shows the current page
of the book along with a progress bar indicating how far into
the book the current page is. Tapping on the progress bar
brings up a dialog
Use the Go menu
Auto Scroll
This dialog makes it easy to go to any page in the book,
either by typing in a new page number, or by tapping and
dragging the progress bar to pick a page number.
The Go menu includes many methods for going to a specific
location in the book. You can find specific text, go to a
bookmark you've placed in the book, go to a page which
you've annotated with notes, go to the beginning of a chapter
in the book and more. The entire Go menu is described fully
later in this manual.
Auto Scroll can be activated by the following menu: Options
-> Start Auto Scroll.
Auto Scroll preferences are accessed from the menu:
Options -> Auto Scroll Preferences.
- 267 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
PalmReader Menu
There are 3 menus: Book, Go and Options in PalmReader.
The Book Menu
The Book menu contains seven items:
Open
Display a list of books on your handheld. Double-tap one of the
books or tap one to select it and tap the Open button.
Delete
Display a list of books from which you can choose to delete.
When you delete a book, all notes and bookmarks for that book
are also deleted. The book itself can be reinstalled from your
desktop computer at any point via a HotSync operation.
Beam
Display a list of books for beaming to another Palm OS device.
Note: Only unencrypted books are beamable.
Copy
Copy books to and from expansion cards that are currently in the
expansion card slot.
Info
Display a dialog that shows the current book title, current page
and total page count, along with information on who owns the
book (when applicable).
Export Notes
Export all the notes that you have entered for the current book to
a Memo called "Notes - Book Name," where Book Name is the
name of the current book. Use the Memo Pad program to view
these notes.
For More Books
Display a screen with the Palm Digital Media URL where you
can go for more bestselling books and magazines.
- 268 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
The Go Menu
The Go menu contains many items which are useful for navigating books.
Searching for Text
The first group of items in the Go menu are "Find" and "Find Again.":
Find
A dialog appears which allows you to enter the text for which you are
searching. Enter the text to be found and tap the Find button. Another
dialog will display which warns you that searching for text in large books
can be time-consuming. This dialog may be disabled in the Preferences
dialog.
You can make your search begin at the current page using the "Start at
current page" checkbox.
The page number progress bar on the book page indicates the progress of
the search. When the text is found, the page containing it is displayed and
the text itself is highlighted.
Find Again
Perform the same search from this location again.
You can cancel a search while it is in progress at any time by tapping the screen.
Bookmarks
The next set of menu items pertain to Bookmarks.
Bookmarks
Add Bookmark
Display a list of bookmarks that have been created for this book,
Add a new bookmark.
Notes
Next in the Go menu are items that concern Notes.
Similar to the bookmark menu items, "Notes" and "Add Note" display a dialog of notes
and allow creation of a new note, respectively.
Movement through a book
The next group of menu items in the Go menu allow you to go to a specific page or
chapter and quickly navigate to the beginning or end of the book.
Go To Page
Same as tapping the progress bar; the same dialog is displayed for
Picking a page number to go to.
Go To Chapter
displays a dialog containing a list of chapters in the book. Select one
of the chapters and tap the Go button to go to the first page of that
chapter.
Go To Beginning Display the first page of the book
Go To End
Display the last page of the book.
- 269 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Going back after following a link
The last item in the Go menu is "Back." This item is only useful when reading books that
contain links.
After tapping a link, choose "Back" from the Go menu to go back to the page you were on
before you tapped the link. Choose "Back" again to go to the page that the link displayed.
The Back menu item doesn't do anything unless a link in the current document has been
followed.
The Options Menu
The Options menu contains items which let you customize PalmReader. It also contains
menu items to help you learn more about the PalmReader application.
General, Toolbar and Screen Preferences
The first section of the Options menu contains items which let you customize the display
and operation of the PalmReader.
Each of these items is described fully in the Preferences section of this documentation.
Font
This menu item allows you to change the font characteristics of the books that you're
reading.
Font-Small
Display the ebook content using the smallest font size
Font-Large
Display the ebook content using the largest font size.
Invert Screen
Swap the color of foreground text with that of background.
Auto Scroll
The next two menu items in the Options menu control auto-scrolling. Auto Scroll is a
feature that allows you to read without manually turning pages. The text will slowly (or
quickly) scroll by while you read.
Start Auto Scroll
Auto Scroll Preference s
Begin auto scroll. Once the text has begun to scroll, you
can adjust the rate at which it scrolls using the UP and
DOWN of the 5-way navigator (up for faster, down for
slower).
To stop autoscrolling, tap the screen with your stylus.
Display a window in which you can set the scrolling speed.
- 270 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Info and Help
The last two items in the Options menu are "Help," and "About PalmReader" which offer
help and display information about PalmReader.
Help
About PalmReader
Display some basic information on how to use the reader.
Display the About dialog, which displays information about the
PalmReader application. This dialog contains the version
number of the PalmReader application which may be useful
when requesting technical support from Palm Digital Media. It
also contains the device ID string, which can be used to register
books at some web stores and libraries so that they can be read
on a particular handheld.
The Toolbar
The toolbar is a line of small icons at the bottom of the book page display. Most of the
toolbar icons perform the same functions as selecting a menu item. You can configure
which toolbar icons are displayed in the Preferences dialog.
Open the menu bar and is the same as tapping the large menu icon in a
silkscreen area or pressing the menu key on a keyboard.
Display the list of books on your handheld. It is the same as choosing "Open"
from the Book menu.
Display the Contents dialog. I t is the same as choosing the "Go To Chapter"
menu item from the Go menu.
Display the Bookmarks dialog. It is the same as choosing "Bookmarks" the Go
menu.
Display the Notes dialog. It is the same as choosing "Notes" from the Go
menu.
Invert the text display as if you had chosen "Invert Screen" from the Options
menu.
Display the Book Info dialog. It is the same as choosing "Info" from the Book
menu.
Display the current time in a miniature analog clock format. Tapping on the
clock icon briefly displays the time and battery level in an easy-to-read form.
After tapping a link, tapping this icon goes back to the page you were on
before you tapped the link. It is the same as choosing "Back" from the Go
menu.
starts the auto scroll feature. It is the same as choosing "Start Auto Scroll" from
the Options menu.
Note: To see a quick summary the toolbar icons, tap and hold on any of the icons for a
short time and the Toolbar page of the Help dialog will be displayed.
- 271 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Bookmarks
Bookmarks are a method of marking pages in your book in order to quickly find those
pages.
To bookmark a page, do either of the following
l Tap the upper right-hand corner of the page to "dog-ear" it. A quick-bookmark is
created and given a default name and a dog-ear is shown in the corner of the
page to indicate that it has been bookmarked.
l Press the central select button of the 5-way navigator
l Tap the bookmark toolbar icon
and tap the "Add" button in the dialog that
appears.
You will be prompted to name the bookmark so that you can more easily refer to it later;
this name is shown in the Bookmarks dialog.
To remove a bookmark
The easiest way to remove a bookmark is to tap the dog-ear.
To manage bookmarks, do either of the following
l Tap the bookmark toolbar icon
l Choose "Bookmarks..." from the Go menu.
This will bring up the Bookmarks dialog which lists all of the book's bookmarks. From this
dialog, new bookmarks may be added, existing bookmarks may be deleted and you can
jump to any bookmark in the book by selecting it in the list and tapping the "Go To"
button:
- 272 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Notes (Annotations)
Notes are similar to bookmarks in that they are attached to specific pages. Notes,
however, permit you to attach notes of over one thousand characters. This is useful to
add "margin notes" to eBooks.
To attach a note to a page, do either of the following
l Tap the note toolbar icon
l Choose "Add Note..." from the Go menu.
You will be presented with a dialog which allows you to specify the name of the note
(which appears in the Notes dialog) and the text of the note itself. Tap Done to exit the
dialog.
When a note is attached to a page or a highlight note appears on a page, a small note
icon is displayed to the right of the note toolbar icon.
Tapping on the right side of this icon
presents the note dialog again. From this
dialog you can quickly delete the note (by tapping on the "Delete" button), or display the
previous or next note (by tapping on the up or down triangle buttons).
To manage all of a book's notes, do either of the following
l Tap the note toolbar icon
l Choose "Notes..." from the Go menu.
A dialog similar to the Bookmarks dialog allows you to add new notes, delete existing
notes and jump to the page containing a specific note.
- 273 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Options and Preferences
PalmReader contains many ways of customizing the user interface to better fit you, the
user. These options include increasing the font size for easier reading, turning off the
tapping sounds and inverting the screen for quiet night-time reading and many others.
These options can be set from the Options menu.
General Preferences
The first item under the Options menu, "General Preferences..." presents a dialog which
allows control of sound, turning off the display of various warnings and other general
settings.
All Sound Off (Master)
If checked, the PalmReader operates completely
silently (including alerts and dialogs).
Allow Screen Page Tapping
If this preference item is checked, tapping the screen
will turn the book's page. If this option is unchecked,
normal page turning is only possible by using the
page up/page down buttons.
Audible Page Tapping
If this preference item is checked, turning book pages
by tapping the screen will cause an audible sound.
Unchecking this item will make page turning behave
silently. This is also useful if reading books late at
night in the company of a sleeping partner.
Display Find Warning
If this preference item is checked, you will see the
following help/warning dialog before executing a
search for text:
Display Image Viewing Warning If this preference item is checked, you will see the
following help/warning dialog after tapping an icon to
display a large image:
Display Conversion Warning
When upgrading from a very old version of
PalmReader (or a version previously called Peanut
Reader), you may see a warning that the format of
your bookmarks and annotations needs updating. If
this preference item is not checked, you will not see
this warning and the conversion will automatically
take place.
- 274 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Toolbar Preferences
The next item in the Options menu controls the appearance of the toolbar.
The toolbar is a line of small icons at the bottom of the book page display. Most of the
toolbar icons perform the same functions as selecting a menu item. The Toolbar
preferences dialog contains checkboxes for hiding these icons on the book display page.
For more information on the function of each of these icons, see the Toolbar section.
Note: There is not always enough space for all of the icons in the toolbar. If they don't all
fit, the icons at the end of the list will not be shown.
Screen Preferences
The next item in the Options menu controls the orientation of the text on the handheld.
Screen Orientation
You can choose to read the book in landscape mode with the
handheld's buttons orientated to the right. This orientation is
particularly useful for a right-handed person reading with one
hand.
Page-tapping
Configure the tapping location for page turning.
Display quality
Choose from the two settings (high and low). A low quality
setting will sometimes speed up the display of each page.
However, choosing low quality will also switch PalmReader
to black and white or 8 bit color, so color options may not be
available.
Images
Images that fit on the screen are displayed inline with the text; images that are larger
than the screen are indicated with a thumbnail icon.
Tap on this icon to launch the image viewer dialog to view the full image. This image,
once displayed, may be dragged around on the screen using the stylus.
This image may be zoomed using the UP and DOWN of 5-way navigator
After viewing an image that was too large to fit on the screen, tap or press any button to
exit the image viewer.
Links
Links are underlined areas of text that take you to another part of the book when tapped
in the
on. Once a link has been followed, you can return by tapping the back icon
Toolbar.
- 275 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
10. Utilities
This section introduces some utility applications; CLOCK let you to view the current date
and time in multiple locations and you can set alarms. You can perform file management
with File Mover and backup/restore data with Backup.
- 276 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
10.1
Using CLOCK
CLOCK let you to view the current date and time in multiple locations (up to 3 locations)
and to set alarms (up to 3 alarms)
To open CLOCK
l Tap Utilities category in Launcher II and select CLOCK
The system time is displayed at the bottom left corner in the form of a traditional clock.
The system time zone and system date are displayed below the date bar.
Setting locations
You can set the CLOCK to display the date, time and location of up to 3 locations.
To set the location(s)
1. Tap one of time bars on the upper screen to pop up the Set Time Zone screen. The
Current Time refers to the current system time in your QDA-700.
2. Select the desired country by scrolling through the list. The local time of the
corresponding country will shown as New Time
3. Tap OK to complete the setting
4. Repeat steps 1-3 to set the other 2 locations if necessary.
To set QDA-700 system time
1. Tap menu and choose Edit Time in Preferences menu
2. Tap the up or down arrow to change the hour
3. Tap each number of the minute, and then tap an arrow to change the minutes.
4. Tap OK
To set QDA-700 system date
1. Tap menu and choose Edit Date in Preferences menu
2. Tap the current month
3. Tap the current date
- 277 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting Alarm
You can set up to 3 alarms in CLOCK applications.
To set an alarm
1. Tap either one alarm entry to open the Alarm Setting
2. Tap the MIDI pick list to choose the desired alarm sound. The choices are Alarm,
Alert, Bird, Concerto, Phone, Sci-fi and Wake up.
3. Tap the Repeat pick list to choose the repeating time of the alarm. Options include
Once, Twice and 3 times.
4. Tap the Every pick list to assign the repeating interval of the alarm. Options include
None, Hour and Day.
5. Tap to select the Hour and Minute at the right of the screen. Selected time will be
displayed next to Time
6. Tap OK to confirm the setting
7. The Alarm icon next to the alarm time is displayed.
To disable an alarm
1. Tap the desired alarm setting to open the Alarm Setting
2. Tap Alarm Off to disable the alarm.
3. The Alarm icon next to the alarm time is dimmed.
- 278 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
10.2
File Mover
File Mover is the complete storage manager for your Palm OS powered QDA-700. File
Mover lets you seamlessly manage the use of QDA-700 applications and expansion card
memory, giving you virtually unlimited storage capacity along with fast access to your
applications and data, no matter where they reside.
Features
l Organize and view your data in folders
l Seamlessly view data on RAM, external memory card
l Move apps and documents back and forth between RAM and external memory with
the swipe of your stylus
l Create directories on external memory card for better organization
l View available memory on RAM, external memory, or the collective total, allowing
you to better manage where you choose to store data
To open File Mover
l Tap the Utilities Category in Launcher II and select the File Mover icon.
A short Creating File List message will flash on the screen when opening File Mover.
Once the message disappears, the default Card View will be displayed. This view list all
files and directories available on the "root" of your memory card. (The "root" of a memory
card is defined as the "top directory in a file system”. This simply means it is the first
directory you have on the card, before you have added ANY files or other directories to it.)
If a SD/MMC memory card is inserted into the QDA-700, the Card View will show its
content; otherwise the content in the expanded memory will be shown instead.
To view data or application
File listing in File Mover is user-adjustable to show either Data or Applications (or both)
stored in your QDA-700. Tapping the pick list at the top-right corner of the screen will
display a small menu. Simply tap Apps or Data to select either type of files to display.
Tapping All will show both applications and data at the same time.
Apps
Refers to "launchable applications". These are files that can be "run"
by tapping them within your default launcher.
Data
Refers to data files in RAM or the directory you are viewing. These
files are not "launchable" and are often associated with another
program instead.
- 279 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Working in Card View
Card View shows the content in a SD/MMC memory card or expanded memory on one
screen, and allow basic file operations such as cut, copy, paste, move, delete and
rename.
Note: QDA-700 is equipped with expanded memory and SD/MMC memory card
(optional), both cards will be listed as separate "tabs" at the bottom of the File Mover
screen.
At the bottom-right corner of the screen you will see a memory usage gauge that
displays your available/total memory for the memory card you are using.
To select file or directory
l Tap the checkbox in front of the file name or directory name.
The Selected number at the top of the screen will vary accordingly.
You can only select a group of files within one directory at a time. Whenever you switch to
another directory, the files will become unselected. Operations can only be performed on
files or directories within one directory at a time.
To select / unselect all files in a directory
1. Tap Select at the bottom-right corner of the screen
2. Tap Select All or Unselect All to toggle the selection.
To open (move down) a directory
l Tap the directory name directly.
To return to the previous directory (move up a directory)
l Tap the very top folder icon which labeled "..". You will see the Creating File List
message whenever you enter a new directory for the first time.
To sort the file list
l Tap column label Name at the header row of the file listing.
The file list will be sorted alphabetically.
To locate a file or directory
l In the Graffiti area, write the first letter of the file or directory you are searching for.
The list will refresh and show the first file (alphabetically) starting with that letter to
the top of the screen.
To view file property
Each file bears its own file property and characteristics. The file size of each file is
displayed by default. You can change the property view by tapping pick list on the left of
the word Size and select among Size, Creator and Type.
To sort by file property
l Tap the column label Size, Creator or Type at the header row
- 280 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
File operations in Card View
In File Mover, you can perform basic file operations such as cut, copy, paste, move,
delete and rename.
To perform file operations, do the followings
1. Tap the file name directory and a small pop-up menu with options (Copy, Move,
Delete, Rename and Property) will be displayed.
2. Tap the desired operation.
Option
Copy / Move
Details
Copy or Move the file from the SD/MMC memory card or expanded
memory to internal RAM. Copying or Moving files within the same
card/memory is not allowed.
Rename
Give a new name to the selected file or directory
Property
Display the detail file attributes
To navigate between directories
1. Tap the directory path at the bottom of the screen and an Open Directory navigation
screen will be displayed. Tapping “+” sign in front of the directory name will expand
the directory list while tapping “-“ sign will collapse the directory list.
2. Tap the desired directory.
3. Tap OK
This allows you to quickly move from one folder to another without browsing the contents
of each in sequence.
To create or rename a directory
1. Tap the directory path at the bottom of the screen and an Open Directory navigation
screen will be displayed. Tapping “+” sign in front of the directory name will expand
the directory list while tapping “-“ sign will collapse the directory list.
2. Tap the desired directory.
3. Tap New or Rename
4. Enter the desired directory name
5. Tap OK twice
Working in RAM View
In addition to Card View, File Move allows basic file operations for the files stored in
QDA-700 internal memory through the RAM View.
To work in RAM View
l Tap the left-most small PDA icon located at the bottom-left corner of the screen.
The Creating File List message will flash before the view is switched.
The operation in RAM view is similar to that in Card View, except there is no directory in
QDA-700 internal memory. Therefore, no directory path will be shown at the bottom part
on the screen.
File Operations in RAM View
Most operations in RAM View are the same as that in Card View (except directory-related
operations). Please refer to the previous section for details.
- 281 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Detail File Operations between Cards and RAM
After selecting files in either RAM or Card View, you have 3 file operation options as
stated at the bottom the screen:
Copy File(s)
To copy file(s), do the following:
1. Tap at least one checkbox in front of the file name to select the file(s)
2. Tap Copy.
You will see a small menu with the options Copy to RAM and Copy to Card in Card
View. Nevertheless, these options are not available in RAM View.
(You can also move or copy the files from Card to RAM, RAM to Card or Card to
Card with the same buttons.)
Copy to RAM
Choosing Copy to RAM in Card View will leave a copy of the file(s) on your memory card
as well as creating an exact copy of the file(s) in RAM. Be sure you have enough space in
RAM to move the selected file(s). You will see a confirmation message before the file(s)
will be copied.
If a file with the same file name already exists in RAM, you will be asked if you would
like to replace the file. Tap the appropriate action to continue the copying.
Copy to Card in RAM View
Tapping the Copy button while in RAM View or choosing Copy to Card while in Card
View will open a second navigation screen exactly like the one that appears when you
tap the directory path in Card View. From this Select Destination section you need to
locate the destination directory. Tapping the "+" symbol next to a folder name will
display the sub-directories available. Tapping the name or folder icon of any directory
will select that directory as your destination. The selected directory will display an open
folder icon. Tap the OK button to finish copying the file(s) into the selected directory
from this screen.
You will see a Copy or Move progress bar while your files are being copied or moved. If
a file by the same name already exists in RAM you will be asked if you would like to
replace the file. Tap the appropriate action to continue the copying.
Move File(s)
Move works in the same manner as the Copy above, but it will not leave a copy of your
file(s) in the original location. Instead, it will "move" your file to the new location and then
delete the original.
Delete File(s)
Tapping the Delete button will delete the file(s) from either RAM or Card View. You will
see a Confirmation pop up before the file is actually deleted, allowing you to cancel the
operation if needed.
- 282 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Setting File Mover
To view or change file mover preference
1. Tap menu
2. Choose Preferences from the Options menu.
3. Change any of the following:
File list default sort by
Sort the file listing by name or by size. Tap the pick list
to select.
Enable low battery warning
Instruct File Move to check the battery level of your
QDA-700 before performing a file operation such as
moving or copying a file. Such file operations will not
be performed if the battery level is too low, until the
battery is recharged.
Enable Sound Notification
You will get a sound notification after certain
operations have been performed, such as moving or
copying files.
Confirm on Overwriting Files
Indicate whether File Mover to ask your permission
before overwriting a file in RAM or on the memory card
if it already exists. Un-checking this option will allow
File Mover to overwrite the file(s) without prompting
you at all.
Default button
Tap to restore the factory setting of File Mover
Tap OK to finish or Cancel to discard your setting and return to main screen.
- 283 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
App View Mode
File Mover allows you to view your files in two distinct and different ways. The first view is
File View mode and is what File Mover uses by default. However, the view can be
switched to App View mode to view any file(s) and see what program they are
associated with in either RAM or Card view.
To choose App View mode
1. Tap menu
2. Choose App View mode from the Options menu.
Applications, or "launchable" programs, are listed in alphabetical order and are not
indented. Other files are listed directly below and slightly indented from the program
files. Any file that is associated with an Application will be listed directly below that
Application. This allows you to view or find any files that belong to, or are associated
with, a specific program on your PDA.
Any items listed with a small circle with a slash through it are files or Applications that
are stored in Flash ROM or cannot be deleted from your QDA-700.
In App View mode you will not have a Move/Copy/Delete menu when you tap the name of
a file. Instead, tapping the name of a file in App View mode will simply select that file.
Tapping the Move or Copy buttons after selecting a file (or files) in App View mode will
automatically copy or move those files into the most recently opened folder in Card
View . If you want to move a file into a specific folder from RAM, you must open that
folder in Card View first, then select your files in RAM View and tap the Copy or Move
buttons.
Selecting an application file in App View mode will not automatically select all the files
directly beneath it. Instead, you must place a checkmark next to each file under the
Application that you want to move, copy or delete.
To return to File View mode
1. Tap menu
2. Choose App View mode from the Options menu.
File View Mode simply lists all available files or directories found within RAM or on
your memory card. The files are listed alphabetically by default. Some files will have
icons matching the Applications they belong to, such as CSpotRun or File Mover.
Files without available icons are listed with a small PDA icon next to them.
- 284 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Tools in File Mover
File Mover has a number of tools available to work with RAM and Memory Card
information. The options available are different in both App View mode and File View
mode:
Select All / Unselect All
Toggle the selection of all available files and directories.
Create Directory
(Available in File View mode only) To create a new, empty
directory in the currently opened directory in Card View.
Simply enter the name of your new directory when prompted
and tap the OK button.
Note: Choosing Create Directory while in RAM View will
create your new directory in the most recently opened
directory on your memory card and not in RAM. The Palm
OS is unable to create directories in RAM.
Card Tools
Selecting this option in either Card View or RAM view will
allow you to Format or Rename any memory card available.
Select the appropriate memory card (if more than one is
available) by tapping the small triangle next to the card name.
l Tap Format to erase all the contents in the memory
card. You will be asked if you are sure you want to
format the card. All data on the card will be lost
after formatting!
l Tap Rename to rename the memory card. Simply
enter the new card name in the space provided, then
tap the Rename button. A confirmation message will
appear when finished.
l Tap Cancel to return to the File Mover screen without
any changes to your card.
Media Information
Display the memory (total, used and free memory available)
and media (memory card or RAM) information in a single
screen. If you are in RAM View the screen will list the Total,
Used and Free memory available in RAM. If you are in Card
View the screen will list the Total, Used and Free memory
available on your memory card.
Activate Plug in
(Available in File View mode) File Mover allows the addition of
Plug-ins that enhance the program's abilities. Any Plug-in files
designed for File Mover that are installed to RAM will appear
in this Plug In screen. Placing a checkmark next to the name
of the Plugin will activate that specific Plugin within File
Mover. Unchecking any listed Plugin will deactivate that
specific Plugin within File Mover. Tap the OK button when
finished to return to the main screen.
If you do not find the options in your screen, make sure you are in the correct view mode.
- 285 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
10.3
Using Backup
Backup is a safety solution to backup all data of your QDA-700 to expanded memory or
SD/MMC memory card. Backup provides a user friendly interface to manage your
personal and professional information. Every bit of your data will be safely archived on
your memory card.
Features
l Simple "One Tap" Backup and Restore of QDA-700 internal memory in Basic Mode.
l Ability to choose specific files to backup or restore in Advanced Mode.
l Time Scheduled Backups available in Advanced Mode.
l Power Off Backups.
l Ability to backup data for multiple users on a single memory card.
l Expanded Backup Log for quick review of the finished backup.
l Exception list to avoid the conflict with other software.
l Fully compatible with mounting software such as PiDirect, MsMount or AutoCard.
l Password protection plus encryption. It provides the highest security to your
sensitive information.
Caution: Please disable any hacks that patch the system APIs before performing a
backup or restore.
To use Backup
l Tap Utilities category in Launcher II and select Backup icon
By default, Basic Mode will be displayed whenever Backup is launched, and the backup
files will be stored in the expanded memory. You can change these default settings and it
will be discussed later.
Work in Basic Mode
Working in Basic mode is very simple as the backup and restore procedures can be
started by one single tapping. Backup files will be stored in the expanded memory.
To backup in Basic Mode
l Tap the large Backup icon in the Basic mode screen.
- 286 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
A message Backup... Please Wait with a status bar being shown as your data is backed
up. Caution: NEVER try to interrupt this backup process or data corruption will result.
Upon completion, you will be presented with a Backup complete screen. All files have
now been successfully backed up and stored on the QDA-700 expanded memory.. The
default location for your stored data is \Palm\PIBACKUP\HotSync Username\, where
the "HotSync Username" is replaced with the Username of your device.
l
l
Tap OK to return to the main screen
Tap View Log to view the backup Log
Backup log is a report of backup procedure to show the backup status of each file.
Tap the OK button in the top-right corner when you are finished viewing the log.
Then tap the OK button again to return to the Backup program screen.
After the first backup each progressive backup will be completed in shorter period of
time, as any unchanged files on your handheld will be skipped during the backup process.
To Restore in Basic Mode
- 287 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Restore is to copy all your data & applications from the expanded memory to your
QDA-700. It can only be done if a backup procedure is already done. You will find a Last
Backup: date and time at the top of the screen in such case.
l
Tap Restore
A message Restore... Please Wait with a status bar being shown as your data is
restored from the expanded memory onto your QDA-700.
If a file on your PDA exists with the same name as a file being restored but contains
different data, you will be given an Overwrite warning box. Choose Yes to overwrite just
the one file, No to not overwrite the one file or Overwrite All to overwrite any duplicate
files that appear in the rest of the restore process.
Upon completion of the Restore, you will be asked to Reset your handheld. Tap OK to
reset and finish your restoration. Your PDA will now be restored to the same settings as
when your backup was created.
When restoring, any files that exist on both internal RAM and the memory card
backup that are identical will be skipped during the restore process.
Working in Advanced Mode
- 288 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To start advance mode, do either of the following:
l Tap Advance button in the Basic mode screen
l Tap menu and choose Advanced Mode in Options menu
You can change the default starting mode to Advanced Mode in the Preferences menu.
The procedure will be discussed later.
What’s in Advanced Mode
In Advanced Mode, you can see the HotSync name of your QDA-700 and information
about your last backup(s), if you have already used the software.
There are 5 icons at the bottom of the screen. From left to right:
Scheduled backup
Schedule an automatic backup on your QDA-700.
New backup destination
Create a new backup destination folder
Log File
Open the log file of the last backup action
Backup
Backup your data onto the expanded memory or SD/MMC
memory card
Restore
Restore your data from any previous backup found on the
expanded memory or SD/MMC memory card.
- 289 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Perform an Advanced Backup
To perform a backup in Advanced mode:
1. Tap and highlight the desired backup destination folder (if you have 2 or more
backup folders listed in the screen).
The default backup destination folder is \Palm\PIBACKUP\HotSync Username\ in
QDA-700 expanded memory, where the "HotSync Username" is replaced with the
Username of your device.
If you want to set a new backup destination folder:
1. Select the desired memory card (either expanded memory or SD/MMC
card (if inserted)),
2. Tap menu and choose New backup folder in Tools menu
3. Enter the name of new backup folder (Backup will create the new folder for
you if it do not exist)
4. Tap OK
2.
Tap the Backup icon at the bottom of the screen. You will see a Searching for
Device info message as your PDA is scanned by Backup. Once the scan is finished
you will see a screen similar to the one below.
- 290 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
3.
Select the files to be backed up.
By default, all the files are checked. You can also choose which files to backup by
placing a checkmark next to only those files you wish to have included. You can also
view your file information by Size, Creator or Type by tapping on the small triangle
next to the word Size at the top-right area of the screen.
Note:
1. You can also resort your file listing in several ways. Tapping the word
Filename at the top of the list will sort it alphabetically by filename. Tapping
the word Size, Creator or Type at the top-right will sort the list
alphabetically by Creator or Type, or by number with Size.
2. You can also jump to a specific part of your file listing by entering any
character in your graffiti area. The list will then adjust to show any files
starting with the character you entered at the top of the list.
4.
Set a password to your backed up data (optional) so that it can only be restored if
the proper password is entered during the restore process.
To add a password, tap Add password at the top-right corner of the screen and
enter your password. All of the backup data will be encrypted accordingly. The data
will not be viewable anymore and can't be restore to PDA using other file
management tools. You can only get the data back by using Backup restoration.
Once you set the password, you can never change/remove it later. Please keep your
password carefully.
5.
Tap Backup at the bottom-right corner of the screen to start the backup procedure.
Your backup will begin and you will see a Backup... Please Wait message along
with a status bar as your data is backed up onto your memory card.
Upon completion, you will be presented with a Backup complete screen. All files
that were stored on internal memory have now been successfully backed up and
stored on QDA-700 expanded memory. The default location for your stored data is
\Palm\PIBACKUP\HotSync Username\, where the "HotSync Username" is
replaced with the Username of your device. If you do not wish to view the backup
Log, tap the OK button to return to the Backup program screen.
6.
- 291 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Perform a scheduled backup
With scheduled backup, you can assign your QDA-700 to perform a backup procedure on
a specified date and time.
To set a Scheduled Backup
1. Switch to Advanced Mode
2. Tap Schedule backup icon
3.
4.
Tap Enable at the top of the screen
Set the options of the scheduled backup
You can choose to repeat the backup by day or week in the first option. Then
choose how many days or what weekday you want the backup to repeat. Choosing
0 will backup your data once only. Finally, choose a backup time by tapping the
word None next to Backup Time. Once your settings are correct, tap the Confirm
button. A box will appear listing the next time your scheduled backup will occur.
- 292 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
5.
Tap OK to finalize the setting.
Note:
1. After a Scheduled Backup your data will be backed up to a second folder
named \Palm\PIBACKUP\SCHEDULE\ that is separate from your default
backup folder.
2. To remove a backup schedule tap once on the Schedule icon in Backup.
Then tap the Disable button and finally tap the Cancel button to actually
disable your scheduled backup.
Set a New Backup Folder
The default backup destination folder is \Palm\PIBACKUP\HotSync Username\ in
QDA-700 expanded memory, where the "HotSync Username" is replaced with the
Username of your device.
- 293 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To set a new backup folder
Select the desired memory card (either expanded memory or SD/MMC card (if inserted)),
1 Tap menu and choose New backup folder in Tools menu, tap New backup
destination icon at the bottom of the screen.
2 Enter the name of new backup folder (Backup will create the new folder for you if it do
not exist)
3 Tap OK
You will be taken directly to the Advanced Backup file listing with your new directory
name listed at the very top of the screen. Tap the Backup button to perform a backup to
the newly created folder.
- 294 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Exception List
You can exclude some specific files from the backup procedure by adding to an
Exception List. Any files found in the exception list will be ignored during a backup and
will not be included in the backup process.
To add files to the exception list
1. Tap menu and choose Edit Exception List from the Tools menu.
You will see a small Update list note while your PDA is scanned for files. Once the
scan is complete you will see the screen below.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tab to put a checkmark on Enable exception list
Tab to put a checkmark next to the file name. Checked files will not be backed-up.
Tap Add to put the selected files to the exception list.
Tap Save to finalize the editing.
- 295 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To remove files from the exception list
1. Tap once on the second icon at the bottom-left corner of the screen. This icon should
look like a medicine bottle. This will open the listing of files in your exception list.
2. To remove files from this list, place a checkmark next to the filename(s) of each file
you wish to remove.
3. Tap Remove at the top-right corner of the screen. Your files have now been removed
from the exception list and will be included in the next backup.
4. Tap Save at the bottom of the screen to finalize your settings and return to Backup.
Restore files in Advanced Mode
Restore is to copy all your data & applications from the expanded memory to your
QDA-700. It can only be done if a backup procedure is already done. You will find a Last
Backup date and time at the top of the screen in such cases.
Note: If you perform a Restore from the Basic Mode the data will only be restored from
the \PALM\PIBACKUP\HotSync Username\backup folder of QDA-700 expanded
memory, not from any other folders you have created with an Advanced Backup.
- 296 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To restore files in advanced mode, do the following
1. Tap Advanced to enter Advanced mode.
2. Tap to choose the folder which stored your backup files (if more than one backup
folder is used before)
3. Tap Restore icon to proceed. The Advanced Restore screen will appear next, with
the name of the directory listed at the very top of the screen
4. Tap to put a checkmark next to the file(s) you want to restore. All files are selected by
default. The same sorting and listing options are available in the Restore listing as in
the Backup listing described earlier.
5. Tap Restore to start the restore procedure.
If you are restoring from a folder with a password you will be required to enter the
correct password before the restoration will begin.
6. The message Restore … Please Wait along with a status bar will be displayed as
your data is restored. If a file on your PDA exists with the same name as a file
being restored but contains different data you will be given an Overwrite warning
box. Choose Yes to overwrite just the one file, No to not overwrite the one file or
Overwrite All to overwrite any duplicate files that appear in the rest of the restore
process.
- 297 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
7. Upon completion of the Restore, you will be asked to Reset your handheld. Tap OK
to reset and finish your restoration. Your PDA will now be restored to the same
settings as when your backup was created.
When restoring, any files that exist on both internal RAM and the memory card
backup that are identical will be skipped during the restore process.
Setting Preferences in Backup
To set preference in Backup, do the following
1. Tap menu in either Basic or Advanced mode.
2. Choose Preferences in Options menu.
3. You should now see the Backup Preferences screen with several options:
- 298 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Archive the unused files
Archives any unused files during a backup if
checked.
Enable Backup/Restore Alarm
Enables an audible alarm before a restore or
backup, useful with scheduled backups.
Overwrite ALL files without asking This will overwrite all files stored on RAM
during a restore without warning given
during the Restore process.
Always start in Advanced mode
With this checked Backup will begin at the
Advanced Mode rather than Basic Mode
when started.
When Power off, backup to…
This allows your scheduled backups to
occur when you power off your PDA. You
have the option to set the backup media –
SD/MMC memory card or expanded
memory.
4. Tap OK to finalize the preferences setting. You can also reset the preferences at any
time by tapping Default at the bottom of the screen.
- 299 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
11. Miscellaneous
This section introduces some miscellaneous applications:
l
l
l
Card Info
Security
Welcome
- 300 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
11.1
Using Card Info
Card Info enables you to review general information about an expansion card. Use Card
Info to do the following:
l Review card contents.
l Rename a card.
l Format a card.
Reviewing Card Information
You can view the card name, type, available storage space, and a summary of its
contents.
To review Card Information:
1. Tap System category in Launcher II and select Card Info icon.
2. Review card name, type, and size.
3. Review card contents summarized by directory.
Review card
Review summarized
card contents
Renaming a card
The expansion card name appears in the Category pick list and in other lists that enable
you to choose where to store information on your handheld. You can name the expansion
card that indicates its contents.
To rename a card:
1. Tap System category in Launcher II and select Card Info icon.
2. Tap the Menu icon.
3. Select Rename Card from the Card menu.
4. Enter the new name for the card.
5. Tap Rename.
- 301 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Formatting a card
Formatting a card destroys all its data and prepares it to accept new applications and
data.
To format a card:
1. Tap System category in Launcher II and select Card Info icon.
2. Tap the Menu icon .
3. Select Format Card from the Card menu.
4. Tap OK.
Managing expansion cards
l Do not remove the expansion card when data is writing to it. Wait for the completion
of the operation before removing the card from the slot. This prevents data
corruption or accidental damage to the expansion card.
l You can install applications to an expansion card after performing an initial HotSync
operation.
l Reading and writing information on an expansion card uses more battery power than
performing the same task on your handheld. If you have ample storage space on
your handheld, consider copying the information to your handheld.
Note: MP3 files must be stored and accessed from an expansion card.
l You will not be able to access the expansion card when your handheld’s battery level
becomes very low. If this occurs, recharge your handheld as soon as possible.
Using Card Info menus
The Card Info menu is shown here for your reference, and Card Info features that are not
explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
Card menu
Help
Provides help text.
About Card Info
Shows version information for Card Info.
- 302 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
11.2
Using Security
To protect your personal information, you can lock the system so that you need to enter
your password to access any of your data or use other features of your QDA-700.
To access Security
1. Tap System category in Launcher II
2. Select Security icon and the following screen displays
To adjust the security setting
1. Tap the Password box.
2. Assign a password and a password hint.
3. Choose the Auto Lock Handheld box.
4. When prompted, enter your password.
5. Choose one of the following options:
Never
Prevent your QDA-700 from locking automatically.
On power off
Lock your QDA-700 when you turn off the screen, or
when it shuts off with the auto-off feature.
At a preset time
Lock your QDA-700 at a specific time of day.
After a preset delay
Lock your QDA-700 after a period of inactivity.
The exact password must be entered to unlock a locked QDA-700. You must hard-reset
your QDA-700 to resume operation if you forget the password. Performing a hard reset
deletes all the records in your phone but you can restore all previously synchronized data
at the next HotSync operation. To lock your system manually, choose Lock & Turn Off,
and then choose Off & Lock.
- 303 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Private records
You can mark entries as private in most applications. All private entries remain visible and
accessible until you select the Security setting to hide or mask them.
When you hide entries, they do not appear anywhere in the application. When you mask
entries, a visual placeholder appears where the entry would normally appear. Password
must be entered to display private entries if a password is defined. If you do not define a
password, you (or anyone else) cannot reveal private entries without a password.
Hiding or masking all private records
1. Tap System category in Launcher II
2. Select Security icon.
3. Choose the Current Privacy pick list, then select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
Viewing all private records
1. Make sure the records you want to mask are marked private.
2. Tap System category in Launcher II
3. Select Security icon.
4. Choose the Current Privacy pick list, then select Show Records.
5. If the Show Private Records dialog appears, enter your password, then choose OK.
Viewing private entries in a specific application
1. Launch the application that contains the private entries you want to display.
2. Press Menu.
3. From the Options menu, choose Security.
4. Choose the Current Privacy pick list, then select Show Records.
5. Choose OK.
- 304 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
11.3 Welcome
When you first run your QDA-700 after charging battery, you should see a setup screen
and guide you to configure your QDA-700 step-by-step. You can run this procedure again
by selecting the Welcome icon again.
To open the Welcome screen
1. Tap System category in Launcher II
2. Select Welcome icon and the Setup 1 of 4 screen displays.
3.
Pick the stylus from the stylus slot and tab twice anywhere on the screen to continue
4.
Tap the center of target shown at the upper-left, bottom-right and the center of the
screen.
By tapping the arrow and boxes to change the following settings
l Country
l Time Zone
l Daylight Saving
5.
- 305 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
l
l
Date
Time
6.
7.
Tap Next to continue
Tab Done to exit the setup and Installer screen displays.
8.
The Launcher II runs and the Home screen displays.
- 306 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
12. Games
In addition to an organizer and mobile phone, your QDA-700 is also your game centre.
Five interesting games are included:
l
l
l
l
Bejeweled
Fruit Frolic (trial version)
Ricochet (trial version)
SpyChase 3D
- 307 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
12.1
Bejeweled
Amazingly simple to play - Unbelievably hard to put down! One of the rare games that
you can play all day 'just one more go' at a time. Choose from a relaxing and absorbing
easy game, or a frantic timed game, as you tap adjacent pairs of gems to swap them and
make matching horizontal and vertical lines of three or more.
Bejeweled features
l Addictive Gameplay Faithful Conversion of the online game
l High quality grey or color graphics and animation
l Sound Effects
l Really Addictive Gameplay
l Two Modes - easy for relaxation, and Timed for a frantic game
l Export High scores to the Astraware Bejeweled Internet High Score Table
l Instructions and Tips included to get you started
l Automatic Hints to help you play
To open Bejeweled
l Tap Games category in Launcher II and select Bejeweled icon. The following
screen displays.
Other screen shot:
To learn how to play
l Tap menu button and select Instructions in Options menu.
To learn more about Bejeweled
l Please go to the following website : http://www.astraware.com
- 308 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
12.2
Fruit Frolic
Fruity fun for everyone! Use your fruit shooter to make combinations of 3 or more fruit!
Three great ways to play
l Fruit Falls - clear the board before the fruit fall down!
l Harvest Time - see if you can beat your time!
l Citrus Twist - clear the board using as few fruit as possible!
Fruit Frolic features
l Fast-paced fruit-matching action!
l Three game modes: Regular, Strategy and Speed provide for every taste in puzzle
games!
l Unlimited levels in each mode!
l Nineteen bonus puzzle levels to tax your mind and increase your score!
l Fantastic enhanced sounds for Pocket PC and appropriate Sony and Palm OS5
devices!
l Choice between stylus / key control.
l Interactive tutorial to start you off.
l Built-in instructions and tips.
To open Fruit Frolic
l Tap Games category in Launcher II and select FruitFrolic icon. The following
screen displays.
Other screenshots:
- 309 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To learn how to play
l Tap menu button and select Instructions in Options menu.
Note: The Fruit Frolic in your QDA-700 is a trial version. You can play 5 games of Fruit
Frolic for Palm for free, as you decide whether you like it or not. After these games are up,
the program will display a short message reminding you to register each time you play!
To register or learn more about Fruit Frolic
l please go to the website: http://www.astraware.com
- 310 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
12.3
Ricochet
Brick bashing for a new generation!
Remember the classic brick-busting game Breakout? Ricochet takes the same concept
into the 21st century and up to a whole new level.
Based on the classic PC game, Ricochet brings together problem solving and fast action
as you frantically bounce your Ion Sphere off your ships shield and try to get it to destroy
all of the blocks on screen. Discover bricks that move, explode, transform and even push
other bricks away in your quest to complete the game.
Ricochet features
l Adrenaline fuelled game that requires skill and speed
l Advanced animation, graphics and sound
l High resolution graphics for the latest machines
l Spectacular enhanced sounds on compatible devices
l Over 150 levels with many powerups
l Three difficulty settings and a hidden insane setting
l High score board allows you to record your scores
To open Ricochet
l Tap Games category in Launcher II and select Ricochet icon. The following screen
displays.
Other screenshots:
- 311 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
To learn how to play
l Tap menu button and select Instructions in Options menu.
Note: The Ricochet in your QDA-700 is a trial version. You can play the first 10 levels of
Ricochet for Palm 5 times for free, as you decide whether you like it or not. After these
games are up, the program will display a short message asking you to register on the
internet or purchase a full version from a shop!
To register or learn more about Ricochet
l please go to the website: http://www.astraware.com
- 312 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
12.4
SpyChase 3D
In this game you act as a secret agent chasing the enemy spies on your hi-tech
motorcycle. SpyChase 3D differs from the common racing games as the action takes
place in the forest, with full freedom of movement. Your bike is equipped with a powerful
gun and you can pick up bonuses to gain special abilities like jumping or cruise missile
rocket.
Game features include
l Realistic 3D game environment;
l Two different locations with different landscape, bikes and bonuses;
l 24 missions of addictive action;
l Sound effects;
To open SpyChase 3D
l Tap Games category in Launcher II and select SpyChase 3D icon. The following
screen displays.
Other screenshots:
To learn how to play
l Tap Controls in the opening screen.
To learn more about SpyChase 3D
l please go to the website: http://www.muddyglass.com
- 313 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
13. DOC Overview
There are 2 memory storage spaces in your QDA-700, namely RAM (i.e., internal
memory) and expanded memory. The expanded memory is denoted by DOC in the
Launcher II of your QDA-700.
All applications and data stored
power drainage, while the data
after a hard reset or a complete
(i.e., the content will never be
expanded memory.
in RAM will be erased after a hard reset or a complete
and applications stored in expanded memory still exist
power drainage. However, only static data & application
changed during the daily operation) can be stored in
To view or access the application in DOC
l Tap DOC category in Launcher II.
- 314 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
14. Card Overview
In addition to the RAM and expanded memory, SD/MMC expansion card can be inserted
into your QDA-700 as memory expansion. When one card becomes full, you can easily
replace it with another card. In addition, you can enjoy MP3 listening and video capturing
while storing the files in the expansion card.
To view or access the application in expansion card
l Tap the card-alike icon in Launcher II (the name of the icon is determined by the
name of the SD/MMC card).
Benefits of using expansion cards:
l Capture and view videos
l Listen to music
l Back up all the content of your QDA-700
l More games and applications.
l Add accessories
- 315 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
15. Troubleshooting
Whenever you encounter a problem with your QDA-700, you should read through this
section to get the answer.
Charging and Power On
The power indicator light does not go on when charging
l Make sure you have plugged the transformer onto the electric socket and connected
the other end firmly to your QDA-700
l Check the power socket to ensure it is in service
l Make sure the battery is installed in the QDA-700 and that the battery is locked.
The QDA-700 does not start up when you open the flip or press any button
l Check the battery is locked.
l Plug the transformer into the electric socket and connect the other end to QDA-700.
Charge your QDA-700 for 3 hours.
l Perform a soft reset by using an unfolded paper clip or the stylus to gently press the
reset button which is situated at the right side of your QDA-700.
l Keep it at room temperature for a while if it has been exposed to cold.
Rapid battery drainage
l Battery usage varies on your usage of QDA-700. Taking pictures with camera and
communication with mobile phone require more power than general applications like
Date book.
l When you are talking on the phone, move to an open area or other locations with
better mobile phone coverage.
l Reduce the brightness of the display
l Reduce the Auto-off after interval in General Preferences.
l Minimize use of the SD/MMC memory card.
Palm Desktop Installation
Palm Desktop setup does not start when I insert the CD (for Windows)
l Click Start in Windows and select Run.
l Enter X:\ DesktopInstaller.exe and click OK to start the setup manually
Why I cannot setup the Palm Desktop properly?
l Make sure your computer has at least 60MB of disk space available.
l Disable any 3rd party anti-virus program
l Exit all other running applications
l Remove any previously installed Palm Desktop software
- 316 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
HotSync Process
HotSync process does not begin
l Check and ensure the HotSync cable is firmly attached to your QDA-700 and the
USB port of your computer. Use another USB port if it does not help
l Make sure the HotSync Manager is running by checking its ico n in the system tray of
Windows System. If it is not found,
1. Click Start and select Programs.
2. Select Palm Desktop and then choose HotSync Manager.
l Check the connection type selected by clicking the HotSync Manager icon. Make
sure Local USB is selected.
One of the applications did not synchronize during the HotSync Process
l Choose Custom in HotSync Manager, check and make sure the relevant conduit is
active.
HotSync does not complete successfully
l Make sure the QDA-700 is connected to the computer during the process
l Choose Custom in HotSync Manager, check and make sure the relevant conduit is
active.
l Read the log for the user account for which you are performing a HotSync operation
l Make sure the HotSync Manager is running and try to restart it.
l Reinstall the Palm Desktop software
How to synchronize more than one QDA-700 with a computer
l Make sure different user names are being used in each QDA-700. Synchronizing
QDA-700s with the same user name may produce unpredictable result and data loss
may result.
General Operations
Memory is full
l Delete unused applications, database, photos, music files, etc. You may need to
perform a HotSync operation to recover the memory.
l Purge outdated records in Date Book and To Do List. You may need to perform a
HotSync operation to recover the memory.
QDA-700 turns itself off automatically
l Your QDA-700 is designed to turns itself off automatically when it has been idle for a
certain period of time. This time duration can be set in General Preferences.
QDA-700 does not vibrate w hen alarms occur
l Check the alarm vibration setting in General Preferences.
QDA-700 does not produce any sound or noise
l Check the sound settings in General Preferences.
My QDA-700 does not respond
l Perform a soft reset by using an unfolded paper clip or the stylus to gently press the
reset button which is situated at the right side of your QDA-700.
l Wait for 30 seconds if you are performing a network connection. Perform a soft reset
if it is still not responding.
- 317 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Writing Problems
Incorrect characters displayed or incorrect command activated
l Calibrate the touch pad (i.e., digitizer) in General Preferences.
l Write in the appropriate input area. Write strokes for lowercase letters in the left side,
strokes for capital letters in the middle, and strokes for numbers in the right side.
l QDA-700 uses Graffiti 2 strokes which is improved from the original Graffiti in other
Palm OS handhelds. Make sure you learn and write the new strokes as in Graffiti 2.
Applications Problems
Entered records do not appear in the application
l Check the Security setting and confirm that Private Records is set to Show private
records
l Select All in the category pick list of the applications (e.g., Date Book, Contacts,
etc.)
Contacts records are not listed in desired order
l Check the Preferences from the Options menu of the application and select Sort by
to Manual. This also applies to Memo Pad
Beaming and Sending Problems
Data cannot be beamed to another QDA-700 or Palm OS handheld with an IR port.
l Position your QDA-700 to the receiving device at a straight-line distance between 10
cm to 1m, and make sure the path between the 2 devices is clear of obstacles.
l Move the two devices closer.
l Check and confirm the IR ports of both devices are enabled.
Insufficient memory space is reported when receiving data
l Check and make sure the available memory space is twice the amount as the data
you are receiving.
l Perform a soft reset
l Delete unused applications, data, music files, etc. to free some memory space.
Mobile Mail Problems
Cannot access my email accounts
l Check and make sure you have followed the setup procedures in Mobile Mail
l Check both your username and password are correct and in correct case.
l Verify you have subscribed for GPRS service or GSM data service in your SIM card.
l Check and make sure the correct account settings (e.g., SMTP and POP) are used.
Consult your internet service provider for more details.
l Make sure the mobile radio is on and you are within the coverage area of mobile
radio.
l Check the Connection and Network setting in General Preferences.
- 318 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
Wireless Problems
GSM Radio signal strength is weak
l Move to an open area
l Leave underground location and move to somewhere above ground
l If your location is surrounded by many tall buildings, move to a less crowd area.
l Keep your QDA-700 with the windshield if you are in a vehicle. The metal frame of
the vehicle shields the radio signals.
SMS Problems
SMS cannot be sent or received
l Check and enter the correct SMS center telephone number. Usually QDA-700 will
detect this setting automatically.
MMS Problems
MMS cannot be sent or received
l Make sure you have subscribed for GPRS service with your mobile phone service
provider.
Camera Problems
The quality of picture is not clear
l Clean the lens of camera with a soft cloth.
l Take your picture under sufficient lighting (e.g., under sunshine)
l Hold the camera firmly and as still as possible.
l Make sure the subject is 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good quality.
- 319 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
16. Notice
(Nov 2004)
QDA-700 Quick User’s Guide
This guide is published by Qool Labs, without any warranty. Changes & improvements to
this guide necessitated by any reason, may be made by Qool Labs at anytime & without
notice.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Qool Labs assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this
guide. Qool Labs assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which
may arise through the use of this software. Qool Labs assumes no responsibility for any
damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or
repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect
against data loss.
Copyright
Copyright c 2004 Qool Labs. All rights reserved. Palm OS and HotSync are registered
trademarks, and Palm, the Palm Powered logo and PalmSource Mail are trademarks of
PalmSource, Inc., and are used by Qool Labs under license. All other trademarks & trade
names are the property of their respective owners.
Electrical safety
This apparatus is intended for use when supplied with power from Phihong, p/n
PSC11R-050. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus and may
be dangerous.
Safety in Aircraft
Switch off your mobile phone when in an aircraft. The interference would be caused by
this product to an aircraft’s navigation system and its network. In most countries, using
this product on board an airplane is against the law
Maximum Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Value
This product meets the European requirements for exposure to radio waves. This product
has a maximum 0.563W/kg over 10g of tissue based on EN50360 & EN50361 Standard.
Limited Warranty
Qool Labs warrants to the original end user “ Consumer “ that the new QDA700 will be
free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use, for twelve (12)
months from the original date of purchase, except the Battery and other accessories,
under normal use for six (6) months, and the product is not assignable or transferable to
any subsequent purchaser / end user. The limited warranty extends to only to Consumers
who purchase QDA700 from authorized distributors / dealers in it’s respective country.
During the limited warranty period, Qool Labs would repair or replace, at Qool Labs
discretion, any defective Product or parts with new or factory rebuilt replacement parts,
and return the Product to the Consumer in working condition. No charge will be made to
the consumer for either parts or labour in repairing or replacing the product, within the
limited warranty period, under normal usage conditions. All replaced parts, or equipment
- 320 -
QDA-700 User’s Guide
shall become the sole property of Qool Labs.
The external housing and cosmetic parts shall be free of defects at the time of shipment
and, therefore, shall not be covered under these limited warranty terms. Repaired
products would be warranted for the balance of the original warranty. Upon request from
Qool Labs or it’s authorized service center, the consumer must provide original purchase
receipt or any other relevant information as proof of the date and place of purchase. All
transportation, delivery and handling charges incurred in the transport of the product to
and from Qool Labs and its authorized service center shall be borne by the consumer.
Exclusions:
The consumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if any of the
following conditions are applicable:
(a) Product is subjected to abnormal use, under abnormal conditions, improper storage,
exposure to moisture or dampness, exposure to excessive temperatures or other such
harsh environmental conditions, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections,
unauthorized repair including but not limited to use of authorized spare parts in repairs,
misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, spills of foods, or
liquids, maladjustments of customer controls, acts of God, or other acts which are beyond
reasonable control of Qool Labs, including deficiencies of consumable parts such as
fuses and breakage or damages, unless caused directly by defects in materials or
workmanship, and normal wear and tear of the product.
(b) If the product seal, Serial number, IMEI number has been tampered, removed,
defaced or altered, in any way or kind.
(c) The Consumer will be billed for any parts or labour charges not covered by this limited
warranty. The Consumer shall be responsible for expenses related to reinstallation of the
product.
(d) If the product is returned to Qool Labs after the expiration of the warranty period, Qool
Labs shall rightfully apply all services policies, to the Consumer accordingly.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGOING
WRITTEN WARRANTY, OTHERWISE, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS THE
PURCHASER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR EMPLIED. QOOL LABS SHALLL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR A LOSS OF ANTICIPATED
BENEFITS OR PROFITS, LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT OF PRIVACY OF
CONVERSATIONS, WORK STOPPAGE OR LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT OF DATA
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABLILTY TO USE THE PRODUCT.
The benefits conferred by this limited warranty are in addition to all other rights and
remedies under any applicable mandatory legislation as may be in force from co untry to
country.
All warranty information, product features and specifications are subjected to changes
without any prior notifications.
- 321 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement